Yamaha PSR-E413 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: PSR-E413

Categorie: Synthesizer

Type: de handleiding

Owner’s Manual

DIGITAL KEYBOARD

2 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO

NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one

described in the manual, on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recom-

mended by Yamaha.

WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could

walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any

kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use

an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18

AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current han-

dling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a

cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is

used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-

pany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the

time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify

any of the speciﬁcations without notice or obligation to update existing

units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an ampliﬁer and head-

phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that

could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods

of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an

audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting

ﬁxtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accesso-

ries. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or

installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional ﬁx-

tures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other

uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a

function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not

covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners

responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer

before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environ-

mentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the produc-

tion methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with

both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the

following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if

applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-

tery is approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes necessary,

contact a qualiﬁed service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these

may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a

rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being

charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries

of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or

incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batter-

ies away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regu-

lated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of

household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason

its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local,

state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that

contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist

you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model num-

ber, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.

You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of pur-

chase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma-

nent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

92-BP (bottom)

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 3

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modiﬁcations not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact

Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(class B)

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den

ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også

selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS:

Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko

laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.

90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard

Model Name : PSR-E413

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

(FCC DoC)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-

dance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may

not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals

in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the termi-

nal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the ter-

minal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of

the three pin plug.

• This applies only to products distributed by

Ya maha Music U.K. Ltd.

(2 wires)

Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands)

Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batte-

rien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie kön-

nen bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll

abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.

(battery)

4 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)

only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or

overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects

on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll

anything over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have

the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or

smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord.

• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during

electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity

markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, ﬁre, or battery ﬂuid

leakage.

• Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together

with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with

manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of

batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, ﬁre, or battery

ﬂuid leakage.

• Do not dispose of batteries in ﬁre.

• Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.

• When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time,

remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the

battery ﬂuid.

• Keep batteries away from children.

• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked ﬂuid. If the battery ﬂuid

should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with

water and consult a doctor. Battery ﬂuid is corrosive and may possibly cause

loss of sight or chemical burns.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or

heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Battery

Location

(4)-12 1/2

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 5

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand speciﬁed for the instrument. When attaching the stand or

rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the

internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes

of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume

controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,

solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

• Do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel

or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the

power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

Saving and backing up your data

• The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory

when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the

Registration Memory (page 80.)

Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save

important data to an external device such as a computer (pages 92).

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not

using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

● Trademarks

•Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Saving data

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your

instrument.

(4)-12 2/2

6 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

The following is the title, credits and copyright notices for the song pre-installed in this electronic keyboard:

Composition Title: Against All Odds

Composer’s Name: Collins 0007403

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with

respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all

computer software, style ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of

such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright

has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is

strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music

data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM

mark is afﬁxed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simpliﬁed version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format.

Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that

some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control

parameters and effects.

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with

peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the com-

puter is on).

Stereo Sampled Piano

The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling tech-

nology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system.

Touch Response

The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you

maximum expressive level control over the voices. It also works in conjunction with the Dynamic Filter,

which dynamically adjusts the timbre or tone of a voice according to your playing strength—just a like a

real musical instrument!

STYLE FILE

The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style ﬁle format which uses a unique conversion system to pro-

vide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.

Logos

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 7

Congratulations and thank you for purchasing

the Yamaha PSR-E413 Digital Keyboard!

Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument

in order to take full advantage of its various features.

Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you ﬁnish reading,

and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function.

The PSR-E413 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.

• Owner’s Manual

• Music rest

• Accessory CD-ROM

Included Accessories

● Music Rest

Insert the music rest

into the slots as shown.

8 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Special Features of the PSR-E413

■ Creating New Sounds Page 18

By adjusting just two knobs you can add varying degrees of distortion,

“sweetness,” or other characteristics to a sound to change it subtly or drasti-

cally. Parameters that can be assigned to the knobs include effect, ﬁlter, enve-

lope generator and more. You can create new sounds in real time!

■ Arpeggio Function Page 14

Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this func-

tion automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play

the appropriate notes on the keyboard. A variety of arpeggios can be pro-

duced by changing your ﬁngering or the arpeggio type.

■ Performance assistant technology Page 23

Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect

performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do

is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the

keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in

time with the music.

■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 28

The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be

changed to violin, ﬂute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can

change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to

play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety.

■ Play Along with Styles Page 33

Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles.

The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band cov-

ering a wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance ... and

much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or exper-

iment with new styles to expand your musical horizons.

102

PopBossa

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 9

Logos ..................................................................................... 6

Included Accessories ............................................................. 7

Special Features of the PSR-E413 ........................................ 8

Setting Up 10

Power Requirements ........................................................... 10

Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)........... 11

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) .......................... 11

Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) ......................... 11

Turning the Power On.......................................................... 11

Panel Controls and Terminals 12

Front Panel .......................................................................... 12

Rear Panel ........................................................................... 13

Quick Guide

Creating Arpeggios 14

Create Original Sounds 18

Assigning Effects to the Knobs ............................................ 18

Using the Knobs................................................................... 21

The Easy Way to Play Piano 23

Play with Both Hands........................................................... 23

Change the Song Tempo..................................................... 27

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 28

Select and Play a Voice—MAIN .......................................... 28

Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL............................ 29

Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands

—SPLIT .......................................................................... 30

Play the Grand Piano Voice................................................. 31

Fun Sounds 32

Drum Kits ............................................................................. 32

Sound Effects....................................................................... 32

Playing Styles 33

Select a Style Rhythm.......................................................... 33

Play Along with a Style ........................................................ 34

Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords.................................. 38

Using Songs 39

Select and Listen to a Song ................................................. 39

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause.................... 40

Types of Songs .................................................................... 42

Select a Song For a Lesson 43

Lesson 1—Waiting............................................................... 43

Lesson 2—Your Tempo ....................................................... 46

Lesson 3—Minus One ......................................................... 47

Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn........................ 48

Play Using the Music Database 49

Change a Song’s Style 50

Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger.............. 50

Using the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 50

Record Your Own Performance 52

Recording Procedure ........................................................... 52

Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ...................................... 55

Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track

from a User Song............................................................ 55

Backup and Initialization 56

Backup ................................................................................. 56

Initialization .......................................................................... 56

Basic Operation and Displays 57

Basic Operation ................................................................... 57

Display Items ....................................................................... 59

Reference

Adding Effects 60

Harmony...............................................................................60

Adding Reverb ..................................................................... 61

Adding Chorus ..................................................................... 62

Handy Performance Features 63

The Metronome.................................................................... 63

Setting the Number of Beats per Measure,

and the Length of Each Beat ..........................................64

Adjusting the Metronome Volume........................................ 64

Tap Start .............................................................................. 65

Touch Response Sensitivity................................................. 65

Pitch Bend............................................................................ 66

Pitch Controls....................................................................... 66

Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics....... 67

One Touch Setting ...............................................................68

Adjusting the Harmony Volume............................................69

Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound............................. 69

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 70

Pattern Variation (Sections) .................................................70

Adjusting the Style Volume ..................................................72

Setting the Split Point........................................................... 72

Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm

(Stop Accompaniment) ...................................................73

Loading Style Files............................................................... 74

Chord Basics........................................................................ 75

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary .................. 77

Song Settings 78

Song Volume........................................................................78

A-B Repeat...........................................................................78

Muting Independent Song Parts...........................................79

Change the Melody Voice.................................................... 79

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 80

Saving to the Registration Memory...................................... 80

Recalling a Registration Memory .........................................81

Setting the Sleep Mode 82

The Functions 83

Selecting and Setting Functions...........................................83

Connecting to a Computer 86

What Is MIDI? ...................................................................... 86

Connecting a Personal Computer........................................ 87

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer.....88

Remote Control of MIDI Devices..........................................89

Initial Send ........................................................................... 90

Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument... 90

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 93

Important Notices about the CD-ROM .................................93

CD-ROM Contents............................................................... 94

System Requirements.......................................................... 95

Software Installation............................................................. 95

Appendix

Troubleshooting................................................................. 99

Scores ............................................................................... 100

Voice List ......................................................................... 106

Drum Kit List .................................................................... 110

Style List ........................................................................... 112

Arpeggio List.................................................................... 113

Music Database List ........................................................ 114

Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM ................... 116

Effect Type List ................................................................ 117

MIDI Implementation Chart ............................................. 118

MIDI Data Format ............................................................. 120

Specifications................................................................... 123

Index.................................................................................. 124

Contents

10 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.

Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC

adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete

resources.

■ Using an AC Power Adaptor

 Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the

instrument is set to STANDBY.

 Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack.

 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

■ Using Batteries

 Open the battery compartment cover located on the

instrument’s bottom panel.

 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow

the polarity markings on the inside of the compart-

ment.

 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it

locks ﬁrmly in place.

For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V

“AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batter-

ies are recommended.) When battery power becomes

too low for proper operation, make sure to replace all

batteries, following the precautions listed below.

If necessary, also make sure to save all important User

data (see page 56), since custom panel settings are

lost when the batteries are removed.

Power Requirements

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent recom-

mended by Yamaha) only. The use of other adaptors may

result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the

instrument.

WARNING

• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument,

or during electrical storms.

CAUTION

AC power

adaptor

AC outlet





• Connecting the AC power adaptor automatically supplies power from

the adaptor and overrides battery power, even when batteries are

installed.

NOTE

• Use only manganese or alkaline batteries for this instrument.

Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may

exhibit a sudden drop in power when the batteries are low, possi-

bly resulting in a loss of ﬂash memory data.

• Be sure to install the batteries in the same direction, maintaining

the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may

result in heat, ﬁre and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals.

• When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of

six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use

different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the

same time.

• If the instrument will not be used for an extended period of time,

remove the batteries to prevent possible ﬂuid leakage.

• Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to ﬂash

memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained

rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become

drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and

the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost.

CAUTION

Setting Up

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 11

Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on.

The PSR-E413 speakers are automatically shut off

when a plug is inserted into this jack.

The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an exter-

nal output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT

jack to a keyboard ampliﬁer, stereo system, mixer, tape

recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the

instrument’s output signal to that device.

The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain

as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha

FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch

sustain on and off.

Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB ter-

minal of a computer, and you can transfer performance

data and song ﬁles between the two (page 87). To use

the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the fol-

lowing:

• First, make sure the POWER switch on the instru-

ment is set to OFF, then use an AB type USB cable

to connect the instrument to the computer. After

making the connections, turn on the power of the

instrument.

• Install the USB-MIDI driver on your computer.

Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on

page 95.

Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOL-

UME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON]

switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON]

switch again to turn the power OFF.

Backup data in the ﬂash memory is loaded to the instru-

ment when the power is turned on. If no backup data

exists on ﬂash memory, all instrument settings are

restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is

turned on.

Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)

•Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long peri-

ods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be

damaging to your hearing.

WARNING

•To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external

devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to

observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment

damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their

minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while

playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

CAUTION

• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUS-

TAIN jack before turning on the power.

• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this

changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed

footswitch operation.

NOTE

Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)

Turning the Power On

• Make sure to purchase a quality USB cable at a musical instrument

store, computer store or electrical appliance store.

NOTE

• Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is

still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are

not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the

AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the bat-

teries from the instrument.

CAUTION

•Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message

is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the ﬂash memory

and result in data loss.

CAUTION

12 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 11

w LIVE CONTROL

[ASSIGN] button.............................. page 18

[A] and [B] knobs ............................ page 21

e [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 11, 57

r [DEMO/PC] button........................... page 40

t [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT]

button ............................................... page 23

y [EASY SONG ARRANGER]

button ............................................... page 50

u [FUNCTION] button ......................... page 83

i LESSON

[L], [R] buttons................................. page 44

[START] button ................................ page 44

o [METRONOME] button .................... page 63

!0 [TEMPO/TAP] button ....................... page 27

!1 SONG MEMORY

[REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons............... page 52

!2 ARPEGGIO

[ON/OFF] button.............................. page 14

[TYPE] button .................................. page 15

!3 SONG CONTROL

[] (REPEAT & LEARN) button ... page 48

[] (A-B REPEAT) button ......... page 78

[] (REW) button .......................... page 40

[] (FF) button .............................. page 40

[] (PAUSE) button.......................... page 40

[] (START/STOP) button....pages 40, 58

!4 STYLE CONTROL

[ACMP ON/OFF] button .................. page 34

[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button............ page 71

[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button............... page 71

[SYNC STOP] button....................... page 71

[SYNC START] button..................... page 70

[START/STOP] button ..............pages 33, 58

Front Panel

001

GrandPno

Song Category List

(page 41)

Style Category List

(page 112)

Display

(page 59)

Panel Controls and Terminals

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 13

!5 Dial............................................ pages 58, 83

!6 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ]

buttons ..................................... pages 58, 83

!7 [SONG] button ................................. page 39

!8 [STYLE] button ................................ page 33

!9 [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............ page 49

@0 [VOICE] button................................. page 28

@1 Number buttons [0]–[9],

[+] and [-] buttons.................... pages 58, 83

@2 [PORTABLE GRAND] button .......... page 31

@3 REGIST MEMORY

[MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] buttons.. page 80

@4 VOICE CONTROL

[SPLIT] button ................................. page 30

[DUAL] button.................................. page 29

[HARMONY] button ......................... page 60

[TOUCH] button ............................... page 65

@5 PITCH BEND wheel ......................... page 66

@6 Drum Kit........................................... page 32

The illustrations next to each key indicate the

drum and percussion instruments assigned to the

keys when “Standard Kit 1” is selected.

@7 USB terminal ............................pages 11, 87

@8 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 11

@9 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 11

#0 DC IN 12V jack................................. page 10

Rear Panel

@7 @8

@9 #0

Voice Category List

(page 106)

Rear Panel

Music Database List

(page 114)

14 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Creating Arpeggios

The arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by

simply playing the required notes on the keyboard. For example, you

could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and ﬁfth—and the arpeg-

gio function will automatically create a variety of interesting arpeggio-

type phrases. By changing the arpeggio type and the notes you play it

is possible to create a wide range of patterns and phrases that can be

used for music production as well as performance.

Press the ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeg-

gio function on.

The indicator lights when the Arpeggio function is on.

● Voices and the Arpeggio Function

This instrument lets you select a variety of “voices” that you can play

via the keyboard. When you select a voice number between 129 and 148

the arpeggio function will automatically be engaged so you can start

playing arpeggios immediately. The arpeggio function will automati-

cally be turned off when you select any other voice.

If you want to use voices 129–148 for normal performance without the

arpeggio function, press the ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] button to turn the

arpeggio function off after selecting the voice.

● Voices for which the arpeggio function is automatically turned on.

Voice No. Voice Name Voice No. Voice Name

129 Concerto 139 ReggaeOrgan

130 Pizzicato 140 Harpeggio

131 Piano Ballad 141 SalsaPIano

132 Synth Sequence 142 AnalogSequence

133 Guitarist 143 Sawtooth

134 Pauls Bass 144 Piano Arpeggio

135 Trance Bass 145 Guitar Arpeggio

136 SynthChords 146 ClubBeat

137 Acid Bass 147 R&B Loop

138 Funky Clavi 148 ClubAdds

• See “Try Playing a Variety of

Instrument Voices” on page 28.

NOTE

Quick Guide

Creating Arpeggios

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 15

Select an arpeggio type.

The most suitable arpeggio type is automatically selected when you

select a voice, but you can easily select any other arpeggio type.

Press the ARPEGGIO [TYPE] button and the name of the current

arpeggio type will appear in the display. Rotate the dial to select the

desired arpeggio type. A list of the available arpeggio types is provided

on page 113.

Play the keyboard.

The sound of the arpeggio produced will change according to the num-

ber of notes you play and the area of the keyboard you play in. You can

save the instrument’s settings at this point and then recall them at any

time you want to repeat your performance (page 80). You can also

record your performance (page 52).

The arpeggio function applies only to the main and dual voices, and

does not affect split voices. The arpeggio function cannot be used at the

same time as the harmony function.

When you have ﬁnished playing with the arpeggio func-

tion, press the ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] button to turn it off.

DownOct

ARP Type

The currently selected

arpeggio type

• Make sure that you are not

pressing any of the keyboard’s

keys while turning the arpeggio

function on or off.

NOTE

Creating Arpeggios

16 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Create a Pop Tune

You can play a style and specify the style chords with your left hand while playing arpeggios with your

right hand to create interesting sonic textures and backgrounds.

1 Select the keyboard voice (page 28).

For this example we’ll use a grand piano voice, so press the [PORTABLE GRAND]

button. This convenient voice selection method lets you instantly select a voice with a

single button press.

2 After turning the arpeggio function on, select an arpeggio type (steps 1

and 2 on the preceding page).

For this example select “02 DownOct”.

That completes preparation to use the arpeggio function.

3 Select the style you want to play along with the arpeggio function.

A “style” is an automatic accompaniment pattern.

Press the [STYLE] button and the name of the currently selected style will appear in the

display. Rotate the dial to select the desired style. For this example we’ll use the “002

8BtModrn” (8 Beat Modern) style.

8BtModrn

002

• Refer to “Playing Styles” on page 33.

NOTE

Creating Arpeggios

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 17

4 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on.

When auto accompaniment is turned on, the left-hand section of the keyboard is used only

for specifying accompaniment chords.

5 Press the [START/STOP] button.

The rhythm accompaniment will start.

6 Begin playing.

Listen carefully to the rhythm of the style, then play the notes shown in the score at the

beginning of a measure. The style and arpeggio will begin playing together.

The accompaniment will change accordingly each time you play a new left-hand chord.

Of course you can also change your right-hand ﬁngering to produce interesting changes.

If you’re not comfortable with right-hand playing yet, you could use the performance

assistant technology feature described on page 23. When the performance assistant feature

is on, playing any right-hand key will always produce musically appropriate notes!

Whenever you’re playing a style as well as a right-hand part, be sure that your left hand

plays only to the left of the split point and your right hand plays only to the right of the

split point. (page 30)

8BtModrn

002

The ACMP ON icon will

appear.

• Refer to “When automatic accompaniment is on ...” on page 34.

NOTE

CAm FG7sus4

Split point

18 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Create Original Sounds

The two knobs located in the lower left area of the panel can be used to

add variations to the sound being played, transforming the sound in a

variety of musical ways. Filter, envelope generator, and other effects

can be assigned to the two knobs as required. In this section we’ll

explain how effects can be assigned to the knobs, and provide a few

tips for their use.

Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequentially select the ﬁve effect combinations provided: z →

x → c → v → b → z → ... etc. The currently selected combination is shown in the display.

z–c affect the main and dual voices only. Split voices will not be affected. Styles and songs will also not

be affected.

v–b affect styles only.

Assigning Effects to the Knobs

001

GrandPno

The assignable knob effects are pre-programmed in the pairs listed above.

It is not possible to assign different effect combinations.

Number/Effect Knob A Knob B

z Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance

x Effect Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level

c EG Attack Time Release Time

v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance

b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect–

Create Original Sounds

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 19

z Filter

Filter effects shape sound by allowing only a speciﬁed range of frequencies

to pass and/or by producing a resonance peak at the ﬁlter’s “cutoff” fre-

quency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of synthesizer-like

sounds.

* Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass frequencies.

Some hints for using the ﬁlter effects are provided on page 22.

Knob A adjusts the ﬁlter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the brightness of

the sound.

Knob B adjusts the amount of resonance applied at the ﬁlter’s cutoff fre-

quency. Increasing the resonance emphasizes the frequencies at the cutoff

frequency, and thus “strengthens” the perceived effect of the ﬁlter.

x Effect

Reverb reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall or club, while

chorus produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect.

Knob A adjusts the depth of the reverb effect, and Knob B adjusts the depth

of the chorus effect.

Filter

Resonance

Filter

Cutoff

Cutoff Frequency

Level

Frequencies in this

range are passed.

Frequencies in this

range are cut off.

Frequency

Resonance

Frequency

Level

Chorus

Send Level

Reverb

Send Level

Create Original Sounds

20 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

c EG (Envelope Generator)

Envelope Generator effects determine how the level of the sound varies over

time. You can make the attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower

for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can lengthen or shorten the sus-

tain to most ideally match the music.

Knob A adjusts attack time (the amount of time it takes the sound to reach

maximum level when a key is played).

Knob B adjusts release time (the amount of time it takes for the sound to

decay to silence after a key is released).

v Style Filter

In this case the knobs apply the ﬁlter effect to the style being played. Knob A

and Knob B have the same functions as for “z Filter” described on the pre-

ceding page.

b Style Tempo

Knob A adjusts the tempo of the style and arpeggios. Rotating the knob

clockwise increases the tempo while rotating it counterclockwise decreases

the tempo. The knob’s center position produces the initial default tempo.

Release

Time

Attack

Time

Key Played

Sustain Level

Key Released

Time

Level

AT TACK DECAY

RELEASE

Filter

Resonance

Filter

Cutoff

–No Effect–Tempo

Create Original Sounds

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 21

Select the voice you want to play on the keyboard.

The name of the currently selected voice will appear in the display when

you press the [VOICE] button. Use the dial to select the desired voice.

For this example we want to use a synth-lead type voice, so select “97

SquareLd” (Square-wave Lead).

Press the [ASSIGN] button as many times as necessary to

select “z FILTER” (“z” will appear in the display).

Knob A can now be used to adjust the ﬁlter cutoff frequency, and Knob

B can be used to adjust the resonance.

Rotate Knob B to its maximum setting (all the way to the

right).

Rotating the knob to the right while the volume is set to a high level can

result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce the volume level.

Using the Knobs

097

SquareLd

097

SquareLd

“z” appears here.

Filter

Resonance

Filter

Cutoff

Create Original Sounds

22 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Play with the right hand while operating Knob A with the

left hand.

If you select a different keyboard voice the knobs will be reset and the

ideal settings for the selected voice will be automatically recalled. In the

same way, if the “v STYLE FILTER” effect is selected, the knobs will

be reset if a different style is selected. If you create an original setting

you like, it might be a good idea to save it in the instrument’s Registra-

tion Memory (page 80) so you can recall the same settings again at any

time. You can also record performances using original sounds you’ve

created (page 52).

The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects

that can be assigned to the knobs.

● Some Ideas for Using the Knobs

Changing the knob settings does not immediately change the sound. Newly

assigned effects will only change the sound when the knobs are ﬁrst

operated after the new effect has been selected.

Number/Effect Try This

z FILTER

Select a synth-type lead or pad voice (page 106). Turn Knob B all the way up and operate Knob A

while playing for some spacey, ﬂoating 1980’s effects.

x EFFECT

Select a voice that sounds as though it already has reverb and chorus effects applied, and turn

Knob A and Knob B all the way down to hear the “direct” sound of the voice. You can then turn the

Knob A and Knob B settings up to add extra impact and richness to the voice.

c EG

Select a piano voice, and turn Knob B all the way up and Knob A to about the 3 o’clock position.

This should give you a majestic, organ-like sound. The attack time is quite long so play the keys

and hold them to let the sound come in fully. Ideal for slow pieces.

v STYLE FILTER

Select style 39, Euro Trance. Turn accompaniment on and start style playback (page 34). Set

Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The overall sound of the style should be

a bit mufﬂed, with the drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact.

b STYLE TEMPO Play a style and/or arpeggio (page 14) and use Knob A to adjust the tempo.

Filter

Resonance

Filter

Cutoff

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 23

The Easy Way to Play Piano

This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature

that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even

though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any

notes and still sound good!

So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can

have some musical fun. It’s never too late to start learning!

Refer to page 25 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play.

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button.

The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature

is on.

Select a song.

Press the [SONG] button, and the song number and name will be dis-

played. You can use the dial or other selection controls to select a differ-

ent song.

For this example try selecting the “010 AveMaria”.

Play with Both Hands

● What is a “Song”?

Of course you know the normal meaning of the word, but for this

instrument the term “song” also refers to the data that makes up a piece of

music. You can listen to the songs, use them for lessons, and use them with

a range of other functions (page 39).

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT]

button to turn the function on or off.

010

AveMaria

The song displayed here

will be played.

Song number

Song name

The Easy Way to Play Piano

24 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button.

Song playback will begin.

The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to four measures while memorizing

the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the ﬁfth measure.

Play on the keyboard.

Play the score on the left along with the accompaniment using both

hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G,

C, E. Performance assistant technology will make sure that the notes

will come out as if they were played according to the score on the right.

Keep playing, and performance assistant technology will continue to

“correct” the notes that you play.

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [ ] (START/

STOP) button.

Adjusts volume.

Before After

The Easy Way to Play Piano

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 25

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn the

performance assistant technology feature off.

The complete score for Ave Maria is provided on page 102.

Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro!

To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands

spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alter-

nately with your left and right hands (any notes will do).

How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where

you play thanks to performance assistant technology!

Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways

of playing produce different results.

Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and

a melody with your right ... or any other combination.

To use the performance assistant technology feature it is necessary to play a song that includes chord data, or a

style with auto accompaniment on.

If a song includes the required data, the chords are shown on the right side of the display (page 59).

You will get even better

results if you match your

left-hand rhythm to the

rhythm of the chord indica-

tor in the display.

Sounds like you’re

playing the right

notes!

● Play with the left and right hands

at the same timing—type 1.

● Play with the left and right hands

at the same timing—type 2.

● Play alternately with the left and

right hands—type 3.

Play 3 notes at once

with your right hand.

Play 1 note at a time with your right

hand (for example: index ﬁnger

→

middle ﬁnger

→

ring ﬁnger).

Play 3 notes at once with

your right hand.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

26 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Next try playing the Chopin Nocturne.

The procedure is that same as that described for playing

Ave Maria on pages 23–25. Select “011 Nocturne”.

Listen to eight measures, then begin playing from the

ninth measure.

Play the keys shown in the illustration. Keep playing F, A and C with

your left hand and the correct notes will sound as the song proceeds.

When you get used to playing the left hand part, refer to “The Easy Way

to Play Piano” on page 23 and try adding the right-hand part.

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn the

performance assistant technology feature off.

The complete score for Nocturne is provided on page 104.

011

Nocturne

The Easy Way to Play Piano

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 27

When using the performance assistant technology or in other situations in which the tempo of the song is

too fast or too slow for you, you can change the tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The

tempo display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons

to set to tempo to anywhere from 011 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute.

You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons.

● About the Beat Display

The arrow marks in the beat display ﬂash in time with the rhythm of the song or style.

Change the Song Tempo

Current tempo value

090

Tempo

Second beat Fourth beat

First beat of measure Third beat

28 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments,

this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass,

strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide

variety of musical sounds.

This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard.

Press the [VOICE] button.

The voice number and name will be displayed.

Select the voice you want to play.

While watching the displayed voice name rotate the dial. The available

voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected

here becomes the main voice.

For this example select the “092 Flute” voice.

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a variety of voices.

Select and Play a Voice—MAIN

001

GrandPno

Voice number

Voice name

Appears when the Voice mode

is engaged.

•You can also select the voice

using the CATEGORY [ ] and

[] buttons after pressing the

[VOICE] button. (page 58)

NOTE

092

Flute

Select 092 Flute

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 29

You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard.

The second voice is known as the “dual” voice.

Press the [DUAL] button.

The [DUAL] button turns the dual voice on or off.

When turned on the dual voice icon will appear in the display. The cur-

rently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the main voice when

you play the keyboard.

Press and hold the [DUAL] button for longer than a sec-

ond.

“D.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently

selected dual voice will be displayed.

Select the desired dual voice.

Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you

want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice.

For this example try selecting the “109 Vibraphone” voice.

Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL

• The dual voice feature cannot

be used during a song lesson

(page 43).

NOTE

092

Flute

Dual voice icon

•You can also select the Dual

Voice display by pressing the

[FUNCTION] button and then

using the CATEGORY [ ] and

[] buttons to select the

“D.Voice” item.

NOTE

D.Voice

Hold for longer

than a second

110

Marimba

The currently selected

dual voice

109

Vibes

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

30 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices.

In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main

and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split

point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 72).

Press the [SPLIT] button.

The [SPLIT] button turns the split voice on or off.

When turned on the split voice icon will appear in the display. The cur-

rently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split

point.

Press and hold the [SPLIT] button for longer than a sec-

ond.

“S.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently

selected split voice will be displayed.

Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT

Two voices will sound at the same time.

Main voice and dual voiceSplit voice

Split point

• The split voice feature cannot

be used during a song lesson

(page 43).

NOTE

092

Flute

Split voice icon

•You can also select the Split

Voice display by pressing the

[FUNCTION] button and then

using the CATEGORY [ ] and

[] buttons to select the

“S.Voice” item.

NOTE

Hold for longer

than a second

042

FngrBass

S.Voice

The currently selected

SPLIT voice

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 31

Select the desired split voice.

Watch the displayed split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you

want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice

which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example

try selecting the “033 Folk Guitar” voice.

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a range of split voices.

When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button.

Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.

The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected.

Play the Grand Piano Voice

033

Folk Gtr

• When you press the [PORTA-

BLE GRAND] button all settings

other than touch sensitivity are

turned off. The dual and split

voices will also be turned off, so

only the Grand Piano voice will

play over the entire keyboard.

NOTE

32 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Fun Sounds

This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can

use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet ﬂy-bys, eerie effects, and

much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties.

◆ Drum Kit Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 28)

1 Press the [VOICE] button.

2 Use the dial to select “117 Std.Kit1”.

3 Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds!

Try out each key and enjoy the drum and

percussion sounds! Don’t forget the black

keys! You’ll hear a triangle, maracas, bon-

gos, drums ... a comprehensive variety of

drum and percussion sounds. For details on

the instruments included in the drum kit

voices (voice numbers 117 to 128), see the

“Drum Kit List” on page 110.

◆ Sound Effect Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 28)

1 Press the [VOICE] button.

2 Use the dial to select “128 SFX Kit2”.

3 Try out each key and enjoy the sound effects!

As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound

of a submarine, a telephone bell, a creaking door,

laughter, and many other useful effects. “127 SFX

Kit1” includes lightning, running water, dogs bark-

ing, and others. Some keys do not have assigned

sound effects, and will therefore produce no sound.

For details on the instruments included in the SFX kit

voices, see “SFX Kit 1” and “SFX Kit 2” in the

“Drum Kit List” on page 110.

Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other normal

instrument main voice, for example, all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at different pitches. If

you select a drum kit as the main voice, however, each key produces the sound of a different drum or percus-

sion instrument.

The sound effects are included in the drum kit voice group (voice numbers 127 and 128). When either of these

voices are selected you will be able to play a range of sound effects on the keyboard.

Drum Kits

Sound Effects

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 33

Playing Styles

This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces

accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to

match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 165 dif-

ferent styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures

(see page 112 for a complete list of the available styles).

In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features.

Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro

trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played

using percussion instruments only.

Press the [STYLE] button.

The style number and name will appear in the display.

Select a style.

Use the dial to select the style you want to use.

A list of all the available styles is provided on page 112.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The style rhythm will start playing.

Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop

playback.

Select a Style Rhythm

001

BritRock

Style Number

Style Name

This icon appears when a style

number and name is displayed.

• An external style ﬁle loaded into

style number 166 can be

selected and used in the same

way as the internal styles. The

style ﬁle must be loaded into

style number 166 after transfer-

ring it to the instrument from a

computer. For details, refer to

the section “Loading Style Files”

on page 74.

NOTE

102

PopBossa

• Style numbers 141, 153–165

have no rhythm part and there-

fore no rhythm will play if you

use them for the above exam-

ple. For these styles ﬁrst turn

auto accompaniment on as

described on page 34, press the

[START/STOP] button, and the

accompaniment bass and chord

parts will begin playing when

you play a key to the left of the

keyboard split point.

NOTE

Playing Styles

34 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page.

Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accom-

paniment that you can play along with.

Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style.

Turn automatic accompaniment on.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment

off.

Turn sync start on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on.

When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a

style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard

split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function

off.

Play Along with a Style

● When automatic accompaniment is on ...

The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the

“auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the

accompaniment chords.

This icon appears when auto-

matic accompaniment is on.

102

PopBossa

• The keyboard split point can be

changed as required: refer to

page 72.

NOTE

Split point (54 : F#2)

Auto accompani-

ment region

Flashes when sync

start is on.

102

PopBossa

Playing Styles

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 35

Play a left-hand chord to start the style.

You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords.

This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try play-

ing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point.

The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you

play.

Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody

with your right hand.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback

when you’re done.

You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment.

Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 70.

Try this!

Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 36.

These examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord

progressions sound good with the styles.

Auto accompani-

ment region

Split point

Auto accompani-

ment region

Split point

Playing Styles

36 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords

Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment.

In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord

sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different ﬁngerings of the same

chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge inﬂuence on the overall

feel of the music you play.

On page 34 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital

to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take

your accompaniments to a new level.

On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the

instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively

creating a complete song.

■Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Play the scores with the left hand.

Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 34.

* The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simpliﬁed scores that indicate which notes to play to

produce the chord progressions.

—Dance music with simple chords—

This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start

again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button

and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending.

Recommended Style

039 Euro Trance

Play to the left of the split point.

Split point

C G Am

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Playing Styles

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 37

—3-chord boogie-woogie—

This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the

progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords!

—Bossa nova with jazz-style chords—

This progression includes jazzy “two-ﬁve” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When

you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Recommended Style

158 Piano Boogie

Recommended Style

101 Bossa Nova

C C

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Dm CM7

Am A7

FM7

Bm7

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Playing Styles

38 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords:

● Easy Chords

● Standard Chords

The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. This function is called Multi Fingering.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 34). The keyboard to the left of

the split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in

this area of the keyboard.

■Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

This method lets you easily play chords in the

accompaniment range of the keyboard using only

one, two, or three ﬁngers.

■Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

This method lets you produce accompaniment by

playing chords using normal ﬁngerings in the

accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords

DEFGABCDEF

Split point (default: 54/F#2)

Root notes and the corresponding keys

Accompaniment

range

•To play a major chord

Press the root note of the chord.

Cm7

•To play a minor chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest black key to the left of it.

•To play a seventh chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest white key to the left of it.

•To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest white and black keys to the left

of it (three keys altogether).

( )

CmM7

CM7

Csus4

Caug

CM7aug

C7aug

C7sus4

Csus2

Cdim

Cdim7

CmM7

(

)

CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

(

)

(

b13

)

Cm7

(

)

CM7

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

Cm6

Cm7

(

)

CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords]

* Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords

will be recognized without them.

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 39

Using Songs

With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a

piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs,

or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the

performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The

songs are organized by category.

In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and brieﬂy

describe the 30 songs provided.

Press the [SONG] button.

The song number and name will be displayed.

You can use the dial to select a different song.

Select a song.

Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 41.

Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to.

Select and Listen to a Song

Listen Lesson Record

Song

011

Nocturne

The currently selected song

and number are displayed

•You can also play songs you

have recorded yourself (User

Songs) or songs that have been

transferred to the instrument

from a computer in the same

way that you play the internal

songs.

NOTE

012

ForElise

The song displayed here

can be played

Using Songs

40 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Listen to the song.

Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to begin playback of the

selected song.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [ ] (START/

STOP) button again.

These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [ ]

(FF), rewind [ ] (REW) and pause [ ] (PAUSE) playback of the song.

001–030 Built in Songs (see next page)

031–035 User Songs (Songs you record yourself).

036– Songs transferred from a computer (pages 90–92)

● Using the [DEMO/PC] button

Press the [DEMO/PC] button to play Songs 001–008 in sequence. Playback

will continue repeatedly starting again from the ﬁrst Song (001).

You can select a song by using the [-] and [+] buttons after pressing the

[DEMO/PC] button.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO/PC] button.

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause

Song start!

REW

Press the fast reverse

button to rapidly

return to an earlier

point in the song.

Press the fast forward

button to rapidly skip

ahead to a later point

in the song.

PAUSE

Press the pause but-

ton to pause playback.

• When an A-B repeat range is

speciﬁed the fast reverse and

forward function will only work

within that range.

NOTE

Using Songs

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 41

● Song List

These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s easy song arranger feature,

songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Sug-

gested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used.

: Includes chord data.

The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, 20, and 30 are provided in the Song Book on the CD-ROM. The scores

for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual.

Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same

as the original.

Category No. Name Suggested Uses

Main Demo

1 Elements The songs in this category have been created to

give you an idea of the advanced capabilities of

this instrument. They’re great for listening, or for

use with the performance assistant technology

feature.

2 Jessica

3 Chillin

Voice Demo

4Grand Piano Demo

These songs features some of the instrument’s

many useful voices. They make maximum use of

the characteristics of each voice, and might serve

as inspiration for your own compositions.

5Sweet! Tenor Sax Demo

6 Cool! Rotor Organ Demo

7 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo

8 Modern Harp & Sweet! Soprano Demo

Function Demo

9 Hallelujah Chorus

Use these songs to experience some of the

instrument’s advanced features: song number 9

for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11

for the performance assistant technology feature.

10 Ave Maria

11 Nocturne op.9-2

Piano Solo

12 For Elise

These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use

as lesson songs.

13 Maple Leaf Rag

14 The Last Rose of Summer

Piano Ensemble

15 Amazing Grace

A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also

well suited for use as lesson songs.

16 Die Lorelei

17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov.

18 Scarborough Fair

19 Old Folks at Home

Piano Accompaniment

Ac Ballad

(Against All Odds: Collins 0007403)

When you need to practice backing

(accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to

do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited

to play with a band. These songs allow you to

practice backing parts one hand at a time, which

can be the easiest way to master this important

skill.

21 Ep Ballad

22 Boogie Woogie

23 Rock Piano

24 Salsa

25 Country Piano

26 Gospel R&B

27 Medium Swing

28 Jazz Waltz

29 Medium Bossa

30 SlowRock

CHORD

Using Songs

42 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

The following three types of songs can be used by the PSR-E413.

● Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument)................Song numbers 001–030.

● User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035.

● External song ﬁles (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–.

* The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 91 for instructions on how to

transfer the songs to the instrument.

The chart below shows the basic PSR-E413 processes ﬂow for using the preset songs, user songs, and

external song ﬁles—from storage to playback.

Types of Songs

Transfer

(page 91)

Record

(page 52)

Your own performance

PSR-E413 Song Storage

locations

Preset Songs

(001–030)

User Songs

(031–035)

Flash Memory

(036–)

The 30 songs built

into the instru-

ment.

Stored in the inter-

nal ﬂash memory.

Save to internal

ﬂash memory. Cur-

rently available.

Play

External song ﬁles

can be saved to ﬂash

memory (036–).

• Different ﬂash memory areas

are used to store user songs

and external song ﬁles trans-

ferred from a computer. User

songs cannot be directly trans-

ferred to the external song ﬁle

ﬂash memory area, and vice

versa.

NOTE

Computer

External song ﬁle

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 43

Select a Song For a Lesson

Yamaha Education Suite

You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or

both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) down-

loaded from the Internet and saved to ﬂash memory. (pages 90–92) Dur-

ing the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play

wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle.

It’s never too late to start learning!

Lesson Flow:

Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category!

The practice methods:

● Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes.

● Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct tim-

ing.

● Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing

along with the song.

In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you

play the right note.

Select a song for your lesson.

Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want

to use for your lesson. As listed on page 42 there are a variety of song

types. For this example try selecting the “012 ForElise”.

Lesson 1—Waiting

Select the

song you want

to learn.

Select the part you want

to work on (right hand,

left hand, both hands).

Select lesson

1, 2, or 3.

Lesson

start!

• Song numbers 10 and 11 are

function demos for perfor-

mance assistant. The lesson

function cannot be used with

them.

NOTE

012

ForElise

Select a Song For a Lesson

44 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Select the part you want to practice.

Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand

lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a both-

hands lesson.

The currently selected part is shown in the display.

Start Lesson 1.

Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the

LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in

sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 …. The

currently selected mode is shown in the display.

Right

Left

BothHand

Right-hand lesson

Left-hand lesson

Both-hands lesson

Waiting

YourTemp

MinusOne

012

ForElise

(Lesson 1)

(Lesson 2)

(Lesson 3)

(Song Lesson off)

Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1.

Select a Song For a Lesson

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 45

Play the note shown in the display. When you play the correct note, the

next note you need play is shown. The song will wait until you play the

correct note.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [ ]

(START/STOP) button.

Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2.

■See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again

from the beginning.

007

Waiting

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

In this case “

r1” indicate that right-hand

lesson 1 has been selected.

~~~~~~~~

~~~~~~

~~~~

When the lesson song has played all the way through your

performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very

Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation.

Excellent

Very Good

Good

• The evaluation feature can be

turned off via the FUNCTION

Grade item (page 85).

NOTE

Select a Song For a Lesson

46 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed

you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own

pace.

Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and

2 on pages 43, 44).

Start Lesson 2.

Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are

selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Les-

son 1 ...

Play the note shown in the display. Try to play the notes at the correct

timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo

will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original

tempo.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [ ]

(START/STOP) button.

Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3.

Lesson 2—Your Tempo

YourTemp

In this case “r2” indicate that right-

hand lesson 2 has been selected.

Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected.

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

Select a Song For a Lesson

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 47

Here’s where you can perfect your technique.

The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening

to the song.

Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and

2 on pages 43, 44).

Start Lesson 3.

Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are

selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Les-

son 1 ...

Play the note shown in the display.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [ ]

(START/STOP) button.

Lesson 3—Minus One

MinusOne

In this case “r3” indicate that right-

hand lesson 3 has been selected.

Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected.

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

Select a Song For a Lesson

48 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to

repeatedly practice a section you ﬁnd difﬁcult.

Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button during a les-

son.

The song location will move back four measures from the point at

which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-mea-

sure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you

pressed the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button, and then jump back

four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat,

so all you have to do is press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button

when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until

you get it right.

Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn

•You can change the number of

measures the Repeat and learn

function jumps back by pressing

a number button [1]–[9] during

repeat playback.

NOTE

Press immediately

Oops!

A mistake!

e Jump back 4 measures and repeat playback

Song playback

direction

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 49

Play Using the Music Database

You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to

select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ...

simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel

settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds

and style!

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

A Music Database name will appear in the display.

Select a Music Database.

Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 114 of

the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that

matches the image of the song you intend to play.

For this example select the “158 Patrol”.

Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your

right.

The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the

left of the split point (page 30). Refer to page 38 for information about

playing chords.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

001

Jude Hey

• Music Database (MDB) ﬁles

transferred from a computer can

be selected and used in the same

way as the internal Music Data-

bases (MDB numbers 301–). File

transfer instructions are provided

on page 90.

NOTE

158

Patrol

Split Point

50 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Change a Song’s Style

In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style

to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that

you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa

nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrange-

ments by changing the style with which a song is played.

You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice

for a complete change of image.

The “Hallelujah Chorus” in the preset songs lets you experience the Easy Song Arranger. Playing it.

Press the [SONG] button, then select a “009 Hallelujah

Chorus” by using the dial. Press the [ ] (START/STOP)

button to play it.

As the song progresses, you will see only the style changes while the

song remains the same.

Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other

songs as well—any songs that include chord data.

Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.

The indicator lights when the Easy Song Arranger function is on.

You can use the [SONG] and [STYLE] buttons to select a song or style,

respectively, while the Easy Song Arranger function is on.

Select a Song.

Press the [SONG] button, then select the song you want to arrange.

Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger

Using the Easy Song Arranger

009

Halleluj

Change a Song’s Style

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 51

Listen to the song.

Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to begin playback of the song.

Move on to the next step while the song is playing.

Select a style.

Press the [STYLE] button and then rotate the dial to hear how the song

sounds with different styles. As you select different styles the song will

remain the same while only the styles change. When you have selected a

suitable style move on to the next step while the song is still playing.

Select a voice you want to play as a song melody.

Press the [VOICE] button. The currently selected voice number and

name will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different voice.

Change the song’s melody voice.

Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. After

SONG MELODY VOICE appears on the display the voice you selected

in step 5 becomes the song’s melody voice.

Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button to turn the

function off.

The indicator will go out.

• When playing song numbers

010, 011 and 020 to 030 while

using the Easy Song Arranger,

melody tracks will be automati-

cally muted and no melody will

sound. In order to hear the mel-

ody tracks you will need to

press the SONG MEMORY but-

tons [3] to [5].

NOTE

Song start!

• Because the Easy Song

Arranger uses song data you

can’t specify chords by playing

in the accompaniment range of

the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/

OFF] button will not function.

• If the time signature of the song

and style are different, the time

signature of the song will be

used.

NOTE

001

GrandPno

The currently selected voice number

and name are displayed here.

Hold for longer than a second

SONG MEL

52 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Record Your Own Performance

You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as

user songs 031 through 035. The recorded song can be played back on

the instrument.

■ Recordable Data

You can record to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track.

Each track can be recorded individually. To record your own performance, ﬁrst

use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the track(s) you

want to record on.

● Melody Track [1]–[5].......... Record the melody parts.

● Style Track [A] ................... Records the chord part.

■ Track Mute

This instrument allows you to choose whether recorded tracks will play back

while you are recording or playing back other tracks (page 79).

Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the

user song number (031–035) you want to record to.

Recording Procedure

• Up to approximately 10,000

notes can be recorded for the

ﬁve user songs if you record

only to the melody tracks. Up to

approximately 5,500 chord

changes can be recorded for

the ﬁve user songs if you record

only to the style track.

NOTE

Melody Chords

Specify

track(s) and

record

Tr ac k

031

User 1

Rotate the dial to select a song

number between 031 and 035.

Record Your Own Performance

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 53

Select the track(s) you want to record to and conﬁrm your

selection on the display.

◆ Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track

Together

Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-

ing the [REC] button.

Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button.

The selected tracks will ﬂash in the display.

◆ Record a Melody track

Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-

ing the [REC] button.

The selected track will ﬂash in the display.

Recording will start when you play on the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the [ ] (START/STOP) but-

ton.

The current measure will be shown on the display during recording.

Stop recording by pressing the [ ] (START/STOP) or

[REC] button.

To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a

second time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off

while recording is in progress.

• Style accompaniment is auto-

matically turned on when you

select the style track [A] for

recording.

• Style accompaniment cannot

turned on or off while recording

is in progress.

• If you use a split voice for

recording, notes played to the

left of the split point will not be

recorded.

NOTE

• If you record to a track that

contains previously-recorded

data the previous data will be

overwritten and lost.

CAUTION

Press and hold

rEC

User 1

001

• If style accompaniment is on

and track [A] has not yet been

recorded, the style track [A] will

automatically be selected for

recording when a melody track

is selected. If you only want to

record a melody track, be sure

to turn the style track [A] off.

NOTE

rEC

User 1

001

• If the memory becomes full dur-

ing recording a warning mes-

sage will appear and recording

will stop automatically. Use the

song clear or track clear (page

55) function to delete unwanted

data and make more room avail-

able for recording, then do the

recording again.

NOTE

Recording

starts

Current measure

rEC

User 1

003

Record Your Own Performance

54 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording the style

track an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will

stop. When recording stops the current measure number will return to

001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will light.

When the recording is done ...

◆ To Play Back a User Song

User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 39).

1 Press the [SONG] button.

2 The current song number/name will be displayed—use the dial

to select the user song (031–035) you want to play.

3 Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to start playback.

● To Record Other Tracks

Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks.

By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5],

[A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded

tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute

previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display)

while recording new tracks.

● To Re-record a Track

Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal

way.

The new material will overwrite the previous data.

● Data Recording Limitations

• The split voice cannot be recorded.

• The following data are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes

made during the song will not be recorded.

reverb type, chorus type, time signature, style number, style volume,

tempo

Record Your Own Performance

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 55

This function clears an entire user song (all tracks).

Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031–

035) you want to clear.

Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer

than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

Press the [+] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [+] button to clear the song.

The clear-in-progress message will appear brieﬂy on the display while

the song is being cleared.

This function lets you delete a speciﬁed track from a user song.

Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031–

035) you want to clear.

Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5],

[A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for

longer than a second.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

Press the [+] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [+] button to clear the track.

The clear-in-progress message will appear brieﬂy on the display while

the track is being cleared.

Song Clear—Deleting User Songs

Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song

• If you only want to clear a spe-

ciﬁc track from a user song use

the Track Clear function.

NOTE

Hold for longer

than a second

Press and hold

YES

ClrUser1

•To execute the Song Clear func-

tion press the [+] button. Press

[-] to cancel the Song Clear

operation.

NOTE

YES

ClrTr1

Hold for longer than a second

•To execute the Track Clear func-

tion press the [+] button. Press

[-] to cancel the Track Clear

operation.

NOTE

56 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Backup and Initialization

The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off.

If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below.

This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s ﬂash memory and restores the initial default set-

tings. The following initialization procedures are provided.

■Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To clear data backed up to the internal ﬂash memory—panel user setting, reg-

istration memory, user songs, style ﬁle 166—turn the power on by pressing the

[STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard.

The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored.

■Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To clear song, style and music database ﬁles that have been transferred to the

internal ﬂash memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the

[STANDBY/ON] switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key

on the keyboard and the three highest black keys.

Backup

● The Backup Parameters

• User Songs

• Style 166

•Touch Response on/off

•Registration Memory

• FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume,

Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel,

Master EQ type, Sleep

Initialization

• When you execute the Flash

Clear operation, data you

have purchased will also be

cleared. Be sure to save data

you want to keep to a com-

puter.

CAUTION

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 57

Overall PSR-E413 control is based on the following simple operations.

1 Press a button to select a basic function.

Basic Operation

1 Press a button to select a basic function.

2 Use the dial to select an item or value.

3 Start a function.

001

GrandPno

Display (page 59)

● Volume Adjustment

Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the

instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones

plugged into the PHONES jack.

Rotate counter-

clockwise to lower

the volume.

Rotate clockwise

to increase the

volume.

3 Start a function. 2 Select an item or value. 1 Select a basic function.

The “Press & Hold” Symbol

The “ ” symbol that appears next to

some buttons indicates that the button can be

pressed and held for longer than a second to

call up a related function. This provides conve-

nient direct access to a range of functions.

Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson.

Select an auto-accompaniment style.

Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard.

Basic Operation and Displays

58 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

2 Use the dial to select an item or value.

When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be displayed. You can

then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item.

■ Changing Values● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3 Start a function.

This is the [START/STOP] button.

Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE]

button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm).

012

ForElise

This portion of the display indi-

cates the name and number of

the currently selected song,

voice and style. It also displays

the name and current setting/

value of other functions.

● Dial

Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the

value of the selected item, or counter-

clockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate

the dial continuously to continuously

increase or decrease the value.

● [+] and [-] Buttons

Press the [+] button brieﬂy to incre-

ment the value by 1, or press the [-]

button brieﬂy to decrement the value

by 1. Press and hold either button to

continuously increment or decre-

ment the value in the corresponding

direction.

● Number Buttons [0]–[9]

The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number

or parameter value.

Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below).

Decrease Increase

Press

brieﬂy to

decrement.

Press

brieﬂy to

increment.

Press number buttons

[0], [0], [3].

Example: Song number “003”

can be entered in three ways.

•[0] → [0] → [3]

•[0] → [3]

(“003” will appear on the dis-

play after a brief delay)

•[3]

(“003” will appear on the dis-

play after a brief delay)

● CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

When selecting a song, style, or voice,

you can use these buttons to jump to the

ﬁrst item in the next or previous category.

The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

are useful for selecting categorized items,

as in the example below.

Example: VOICE SELECT

In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you

ﬁrst use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the cat-

egory containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-]

buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when

you have to select from a large number of voices.

Jump to the ﬁrst item

in the next or previ-

ous category.

090

SweetFlt

The ﬁrst voice in the selected

category is selected.

In most procedures described throughout this owner’s

manual the dial is recommended for selection simply

because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection

method. Please note however, that most items or values

that can be selected using the dial can also be selected

using the [+] and [-] buttons.

Basic Operation and Displays

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 59

The display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice.

It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions.

Display Items

001

GrandPno

Indicates that Touch response

is turned on. (see page 65)

Indicates that Harmony is

turned on. (see page 60)

Indicates that the Dual voice is

turned on. (see page 29)

Indicates that the Split voice is

turned on. (see page 30)

Indicates that the Arpeggio is

turned on. (see page 14)

Indicates that performance

assistant technology is turned

on. (see

page 23)

Indicates that Accompaniment

is turned on. (see page 34)

Indicates that SYNC STOP is

turned on. (see page 71)

TOUCH

HARMONY

DUAL

SPLIT

ARPEGGIO

Performance assistant technology

ACMP ON

SYNC STOP

Displays the melody and chord

notes of a song when the Song

Lesson function is in use, or the

notes of chords you specify when

the Dictionary function is in use. At

other times the notes you play on

the keyboard are displayed.

Notation

•Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indi-

cated by “8va” in the notation.

•For a few speciﬁc chords, not all notes may be shown in

the notation section of the display. This is due to space

limitations in the display.

NOTE

Indicates the beat number in a mea-

sure during the Metronome function.

Indicates the current measure dur-

ing playback of a song or style, and

the currently set Tempo value for the

song or style. (see page 27)

Indicates the name of the chord cur-

rently being played back, or the

name of the chord being played on

the keyboard.

Information related to the song tracks is shown here. (see

page 52, 79)

BEAT number and MEASURE

Chord Display

Song Track Display

001

Indicates the current style or song

beat with ﬂashing arrows. (see page

27)

This display allows you to visually

conﬁrm parameters assigned to the

knobs. (see page 18)

Beat Display

Knob Assign Display

60 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Adding Effects

This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice.

Press the [HARMONY] button to turn

Harmony feature on.

To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY]

button again.

When you press the [HARMONY] button to

turn this feature on, the appropriate harmony

type for the currently selected main voice is

automatically selected.

Press and hold the [HARMONY] button

for longer than a second so that the

Harmony Type item appears.

“HarmType” appears in the display for a few

seconds, and the currently selected harmony

type will be displayed. Use the dial to select a

different harmony type.

Use the dial to select a harmony type.

Refer to the Effect Type List on page 117 for

information about the available harmony types.

Try playing the keyboard with the harmony

function. The effect and operation of each Har-

mony Type is different-refer to the below sec-

tion “How to sound each Harmony Type” as

well as the Effect Type List for details.

Harmony

When harmony is on the

harmony icon will appear

in the display.

Trio

HarmType

The currently selected harmony type

Hold for longer

than a second.

• The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual

or Split Voices.

• The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony

notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit).

NOTE

● How to sound each Harmony Type

• Harmony type 01 to 05

• Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill)

Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the

auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when

the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 34).

Hold down two keys.

• Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo)

• Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo)

You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the

Function Settings (page 69).

Keep holding down the keys.

Reference

Adding Effects

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 61

Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum

reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the

procedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to select the Reverb Type item.

“Reverb” appears in the display for a few sec-

onds, and the currently selected reverb type

will be displayed.

Use the dial to select a reverb type.

You can check how the selected reverb type

sounds by playing on the keyboard.

Refer to the Effect Type List on page 117 for

information about the available reverb types.

● Adjusting the Reverb Send Level

You can individually adjust the amount of reverb

that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.

(See page 84).

Adding Reverb

100

StyleVol

Hall2

The currently selected reverb type

Reverb

Hall3

Selected reverb type

62 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Adding Effects

The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison.

When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If

you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the

CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to select the Chorus Type item.

“Chorus” appears in the display for a few sec-

onds, and the currently selected chorus type

will be displayed.

Use the dial to select a chorus type.

You can check how the selected chorus type

sounds by playing on the keyboard.

Refer to the Effect Type List on page 117 for

information about the available chorus types.

● Adjusting the Chorus Send Level

You can individually adjust the amount of chorus

that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.

(See page 84).

Adding Chorus

Chorus1

Chorus

The currently selected chorus type

Chorus2

Selected chorus type

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 63

Handy Performance Features

The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature.

Use it to set the tempo that is most comfortable for you.

■Start the metronome ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Turn the metronome on and start it by

pressing the [METRONOME] button.

To stop the metronome, press the [METRO-

NOME] button again.

■Adjusting the Metronome

Tempo

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call

up the tempo setting.

Use the dial to select a tempo from 11 to

280.

The Metronome

001

GrandPno

Indicates the beat number

in the measure

090

Tempo

Current Tempo setting

64 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Handy Performance Features

In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature.

Press and hold the [METRONOME] but-

ton for longer than a second to select

the number of beats per measure func-

tion “TimesigN”.

Use the dial to select the number of

beats per measure.

A chime will sound on the ﬁrst beat of each

measure while the other beats will click. All

beats will simply click with no chime at the

beginning of each measure if you set this

parameter to “00”.

The available range is from 0 through 60.

Select 5 for this example.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the beat length function

“TimesigD”.

The currently selected beat length will be dis-

played.

Use the dial to select the beat length.

Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8,

or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or

note). Select 8 for this example.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Metronome Volume

item.

Use the dial to set the metronome vol-

ume as required.

Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat

Number of beats per measure.

TimesigN

Hold for longer than

a second.

• The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song

that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style

or song is playing.

NOTE

TimesigD

The length of one beat.

Adjusting the Metronome Volume

Metronome

volume

100

MtrVol

Handy Performance Features

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 65

You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at

any tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected style/

song will begin playing at the tapped tempo.

When touch response is on you can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps.

Press the [TOUCH] button to turn touch

response on.

The touch response icon will appear in the dis-

play when touch response is on (page 59).

Press and hold the [TOUCH] button for

longer than a second so that the Touch

Sensitivity item appears.

“TouchSns” appears in the display for a few

seconds, and the currently selected touch sensi-

tivity will be displayed.

Use the dial in response to keyboard

dynamics to select a touch sensitivity

setting between 1 and 3. Higher values

produce greater (easier) volume varia-

tion in response to keyboard dynam-

ics—i.e. greater sensitivity.

Tap Start

Touch Response Sensitivity

001

GrandPno

Touch response icon

TouchSns

Hold for longer

than a second.

Touch Sensitivity

Medium

• The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”.

NOTE

66 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Handy Performance Features

The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll

the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a voice

such as the “040 Overdriven” guitar voice, you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending effects.

◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose)

The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted

up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone

increments.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Transpose item.

Use the dial to set the transpose value

between -12 and +12 as required.

◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning)

The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted

up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent

increments (100 cents = 1 semitone).

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Tuning item.

Use the dial to set the tuning value

between -100 and +100 as required.

Pitch Bend

Pitch Controls

Transpos

• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.

NOTE

000

Tuning

• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.

NOTE

Handy Performance Features

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 67

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the arpeggio velocity function

“ARP Velo”.

“ARP Velo” will be shown in the display for a

few seconds, then the currently selected arpeg-

gio velocity setting will appear.

Use the dial to select “2 Thru”.

When “1 Original” is selected the arpeggio vol-

ume is the same regardless of changes in key-

board velocity.

Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics

Original

The currently selected

arpeggio velocity.

ARP Velo

68 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Handy Performance Features

Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting

feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select

voice number “000” to activate this feature.

Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2

on page 28).

Select and play back any song (steps 1

to 3 on page 39).

Play the keyboard and remember the

sound of the voice.

If you have stopped playback at some point

during this procedure press the [ ]

(START/STOP) button to start playback again.

Use the dial to change songs, then play

the keyboard and listen to the voice.

You should hear a different keyboard voice

than you played in step 3. Press the [VOICE]

button after changing songs to see the name of

the voice being used.

One Touch Setting

000

SweetSpr

Use the dial to select voice number 000.

Handy Performance Features

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 69

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Harmony Volume

item.

Use the dial to set the harmony volume

between 000 and 127.

Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listen-

ing through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external

speaker system.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in

the display.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the master EQ type function

“MasterEQ”.

“MasterEQ” will be shown in the display for a

few seconds, then the currently selected EQ

type will appear.

Use the dial to select the desired Master

EQ setting.

Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and

2 are best for listening via the instrument’s

built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones,

and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via

external speakers.

Adjusting the Harmony Volume

080

HarmVol

Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound

Speakerl

MasterEQ

The currently selected

master EQ type.

70 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 33 of

the Quick Guide.

Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment proce-

dure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more.

The PSR-E413 features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the

accompaniment to match the song you are playing.

● INTRO section

This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro ﬁnishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main sec-

tion. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

● MAIN section

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indeﬁnitely

until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style

playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand.

● Fill-in section

This is automatically added before changing to section A or B.

● ENDING section

This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically.

The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

Press the [STYLE] button and then

select a style.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to

turn auto accompaniment on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

synchro start on.

Pattern Variation (Sections)

Main A/BIntro

Auto ﬁll

Ending

Appears when Auto

Accompaniment is on.

● Synchro Start

When the synchro start standby mode is engaged,

style playback will begin as soon as you play a

chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode

by pressing the [SYNC START] button again.

Beat arrows will ﬂash when

the synchro start standby

mode is engaged

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 71

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

You’re now ready to play the intro.

As soon as you play a chord with your

left hand, the Intro of the selected Style

starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as

shown below). For information on how to enter

chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment

Chords” on page 38.

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

When the ﬁll-in is ﬁnished, it leads smoothly

into the selected main section A/B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

This switches to the ending section.

When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompa-

niment stops automatically. You can have the

ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by

pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button

again while the ending is playing back.

MAIN A

The name of the selected section—

MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed.

INTRO≥A

Accompaniment

range

Split point

FILL A≥B

● Synchro Stop

When this function is selected the accompaniment

style will only play while you are playing chords

in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Style playback will stop when you release the

keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC

STOP] button.

ENDING

Appears when the syn-

chro-stop function is

engaged.

The style will play

while you are playing

the keys

Style playback will

stop when you

release the keys

72 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Press the [STYLE] button to engage the

style function.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Style Volume item.

Use the dial to set the style volume

between 000 and 127.

The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the

procedure described below.

Press the [STYLE] button.

Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] for

longer than a second so that the Split

point item appears.

Use the dial to set the split point to any

key from 000 through 127.

Adjusting the Style Volume

100

StyleVol

Setting the Split Point

054

SplitPnt

Hold for longer than a second

Split point

Split point (54 : F#2)

Main voice

Split voice

• When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point

also changes.

• The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson.

NOTE

•You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION]

button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the

item (page 83).

NOTE

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 73

When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play

chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the

accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord ﬁngerings recognized by the

instrument can be used (page 38).

Press the [STYLE] button to engage the

style function, then press the [ACMP ON/

OFF] button to turn the auto accompani-

ment on.

Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment)

102

PopBossa

Appears when auto accompaniment is on

Accompaniment

range

74 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

This instrument features 165 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and

others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” sufﬁx), can be loaded into style

number 166 and used in the same way as the internal styles.

In order to use the style ﬁle load function, the ﬁle must already have been transferred from the computer to

the instrument. The procedure for transferring ﬁles from a computer to the instrument is described on page

90 (“Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument”).

The procedure described below loads a style ﬁle that has already been transferred from a computer to the

instrument into style number 166.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in

the display.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the style ﬁle load function “Sff

Load”.

After about 2 seconds the name of a loadable

style ﬁle will appear in the display.

If multiple loadable style ﬁles have been trans-

ferred to the instrument, you can use the dial or

the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other ﬁles in

sequence.

Execute the load operation.

With the name of the style ﬁle you want to load

shown in the display, press the number [0] but-

ton.

A conﬁrmation message for the load

operation will appear. Press the [+/YES]

button to actually load the ﬁle.

Loading Style Files

Sff Load

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 75

Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”.

The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the

root, third, and ﬁfth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad,

for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the

C major scale), and G (the ﬁfth note of the C major scale).

In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the

chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for

the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and

anchors the other chord notes.

The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third.

The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad

is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two addi-

tional chords, as shown below.

The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create

different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by

choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”).

● Reading Chord Names

Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord

(other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the

chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a

major or ﬂatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance.

● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the PSR-E413.)

Chord Basics

3rd

Root

Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones)

CM Cm Caug Cdim

Major chord

Minor 3rd

Major 3rd

Minor 3rd

Major 3rd

Minor 3rd

Minor chord Augmented chord Diminished chord

Root note Chord type

Csus4 C7 Cm7 CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

C7sus4

CmM7

Perfect 5

Perfect 4

Flatted 7

Major chord Flatted 7

Minor chord Major 7

Major chord

Major 7

Minor chord Flatted 5

chord

Flatted 5

Minor 7

chord

Flatted 7

Suspended

chord

Suspended 4

Minor 7

Major 7

, suspended 4

Minor 7

, ﬂatted 5

Minor/major 7

76 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

■Recognized Standard Chords● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords.

* These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function.

Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C

Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C

(9)

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6

Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6

(9)

Major seventh [M7]

1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - 7

CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7

(9)

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

CM7

(#11)

Flatted ﬁfth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C

Major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug *

Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm

Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm

(9)

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7

(9)

Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7

(11)

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

(9)

Minor seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7

Minor major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7

Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7

Seventh [7]

1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - b7

Seventh ﬂatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

(b9)

Seventh add ﬂatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7C7

(b13)

Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

(9)

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

(#11)

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7C7

(13)

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

(#9)

Seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4

Suspended second [sus2] 1 - 2 - 5 C *

(

)

(

)

CM7

(

)

CM7

(

#11

)

(

)

CM7

(

)

Csus4

Caug

CM7aug

(

)

Cm6

Cm7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

Cdim

Cdim7

(

)

(

b13

)

(

)

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

C7b5

C7aug

C7sus4

Csus2

• Notes in parentheses can be omitted.

• Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompa-

niment based only on the root.

•A perfect ﬁfth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only on the root

and ﬁfth which can be used with both major and minor chords.

• The chord ﬁngerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions

can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7

5, 6, m6, sus4,

aug, dim7, 7

5, 6(9), sus2.

NOTE

•Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the

notes shown in parentheses are omitted.

• The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related

chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the

minor seventh).

•Two-note ﬁngerings will produce a chord based on the previously played

chord.

NOTE

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 77

The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords.

It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.

Press and hold the LESSON [START]

button for longer than a second.

As an example, we’ll learn how to play a

GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the

“G” key in the section of the keyboard

labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t

sound.) The root note you set is shown

in the display.

Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in

the section of the keyboard labeled

“CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t

sound.) The notes you should play for

the speciﬁed chord (root note and

chord type) are shown in the display,

both as notation and in the keyboard

diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord,

press the [+]/[-] buttons.

Try playing a chord in the auto accom-

paniment section of the keyboard,

checking the indications in the display.

When you’ve played the chord properly,

a bell sound signals your success and

the chord name in the display ﬂash.

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary

Dict.

Hold for longer than

a second

001

Dict.

001

Dict.

Notation of chord

Chord name (root and type)

Individual notes of chord (keyboard)

• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only

by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when

specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after

pressing the root note.

NOTE

78 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Song Settings

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Song Volume item.

Use the dial to set the song volume

between 000 and 127.

You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the

start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat

playback.

Play the song (page 39) and press the

[] (A-B REPEAT) button at the

beginning of the section you want to

repeat (the “A” point).

Press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button

a second time at the end of the section

you want to repeat (the “B” point).

The speciﬁed A-B section of the song

will now play repeatedly.

You can stop repeat playback at any time by

pressing the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button.

Song Volume

100

SongVol

Song volume

• Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected.

NOTE

A-B Repeat

• The repeat start and end points can be speciﬁed in one-measure

increments.

• The current measure number is shown in the display during play-

back.

• If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song

press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button before starting playback of

the song.

NOTE

Song Settings

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 79

Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the

song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc.

You can mute individual tracks and play the muted

part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute

tracks other than the ones you want to listen to.

To mute a track, press the appropriate track button

(TRACK [1]–[5], [A]) button. Press the same but-

ton a second time to disengage track muting.

You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer.

Select the song and play it.

Rotate the dial to select the voice you

want to listen to after pressing the

[VOICE] button.

Press the [VOICE] button for longer

than a second.

“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the

display for a few seconds, indicating

that the voice selected in step #2 has

replaced the song’s original melody

voice.

Muting Independent Song Parts

Track number on—Track will playback

Track number off—Track is muted or

contains no data

Change the Melody Voice

•You cannot change the melody voice of a user song.

NOTE

050

Strings

SONG MEL

Hold for longer than

a second

80 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite set-

tings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved

(8 banks of two setups each).

Set the panel controls as required—

select a voice, accompaniment style,

etc.

Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A

bank number will appear in the display

when you release the button.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-

tons to select a bank number from 1 to

Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2]

button while holding the [MEMORY/

BANK] button to store the current panel

settings to the speciﬁed registration

memory.

8 Banks

Memory 1

Up to 16 presets (eight

banks of two each) can be

memorized.

Memory 2

Saving to the Registration Memory

Bank

Bank number

• Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song play-

back.

NOTE

Writing!

• If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains

data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data.

NOTE

• Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registra-

tion memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost.

CAUTION

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 81

Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A

bank number will appear in the display

when you release the button.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-

tons to select bank you want to recall.

Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1]

or [2], containing the settings you want

to recall. The recalled REGIST MEMORY

number appears in the display for a few

seconds. The panel controls will be

instantly set accordingly.

Recalling a Registration Memory

Bank number

Bank

REGIST 1

● Settings That Can be Saved to the Registra-

tion Memory

• Style settings*

Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF,

Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B),

Style Volume, Tempo

• Voice settings

Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume,

Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Attack Time,

Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance,

Chorus Send Level), Dual Voice settings

(Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave,

Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level,

Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter

Resonance), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF,

Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan,

Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level)

• Effect settings

Reverb Type, Chorus Type

• Arpeggio settings

Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio ON/OFF

• Harmony settings

Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type,

Harmony Volume

• Other settings

Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob Assign

* Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when

using the Song features.

82 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Setting the Sleep Mode

This instrument has a Sleep Mode function that allows it to automatically go into a low-

power “sleep” mode if not operated for speciﬁed period of time. In Sleep Mode all panel

indicators and the display backlight are off to conserve power. The Sleep Mode func-

tion is initially disabled (OFF) by default.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the

CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to select the SLEEP item.

Rotate the dial to set the desired time

until Sleep Mode begins (3–20 minutes).

The time can be set in one-minute increments.

Select OFF to disable Sleep Mode (the instru-

ment will not go to sleep). The instrument will

wake from Sleep Mode as soon as a panel con-

trol is operated, a key is pressed, or a MIDI

command is received. No sound will be pro-

duced for approximately two seconds after

waking from sleep.

Sleep

oFF

Time to Sleep Mode

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 83

The Functions

The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tun-

ing, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the func-

tion list starting on the opposite page.

When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display

name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required.

Find the function you want to set in the

list that begins on page 84.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Select a function.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as

many times as necessary until the function’s

display name appears in the display.

Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or

the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the

selected function as required.

The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/

OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF.

In some cases the [+] button will initiate execu-

tion of the selected function, and the [-] will

cancel the selection.

Some Function settings are stored in memory

as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup

Parameters” on page 56 for information on the

function settings that are stored on the instru-

ment.

To restore all initial factor default settings per-

form the “Backup Clear” procedure described

in the “Initialization” section on page 56.

Selecting and Setting Functions

100

StyleVol

Transpos

The selected function.

Direct numeric

entry.

•Increment value by 1.

•ON

•Execute

• Decrement value by 1.

• OFF

• Cancel

Press simultaneously to

recall the default setting.

84 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

The Functions

● Function Setting List

Setting Item title Range/Settings Description

Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style.

Song Volume SongVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song.

Transpose Transpos -12–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments.

Tuning Tuning -100–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.

Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments.

Split Point SplitPnt

000–127

(C-2–G8)

Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—

in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper)

voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are

automatically set to the same value.

Touch Sensitivity TouchSns

1(Soft),

2(Medium),

3(Hard)

When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the

feature.

Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice.

Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice.

Main Voice Pan M.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”

results in the sound being panned full right.

Main Voice Reverb Level M.Reverb 000–127

Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb

effect.

Main Voice Chorus Level M.Chorus 000–127

Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

Main Voice Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 Sets the Main voice attack time.

Main Voice Release Time M.Releas 000–127 Sets the Main voice release time.

Main Voice Filter Cutoff M.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Main voice ﬁlter cutoff frequency.

Main Voice Filter

Resonance

M.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Main voice ﬁlter resonance.

Dual Voice D.Voice 001–509 Selects the Dual voice.

Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice.

Dual Voice Octave D.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice.

Dual Voice Pan D.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”

results in the sound being panned full right.

Dual Voice Reverb Level D.Reverb 000–127

Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb

effect.

Dual Voice Chorus Level D.Chorus 000–127

Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

Dual Voice Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 Sets the Dual voice attack time.

Dual Voice Release Time D.Releas 000–127 Sets the Dual voice release time.

Dual Voice Filter Cutoff D.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Dual voice ﬁlter cutoff frequency.

Dual Voice Filter

Resonance

D.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Dual voice ﬁlter resonance.

Split Voice S.Voice 001–509 Selects the Split voice.

Split Voice Volume S.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice.

Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice.

Split Voice Pan S.Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”

results in the sound being panned full right.

Split Voice Reverb Level S.Reverb 000–127

Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb

effect.

Split Voice Chorus Level S.Chorus 000–127

Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

The Functions

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 85

*All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is

Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.)

Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (See the list on page 117)

Chorus Type Chorus 01–05 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (See the list on page 117)

Master EQ Type MasterEQ

Speaker1,

Speaker2,

Headphone,

Line Out1,

Line Out2

Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in

different listening situations.

Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 117)

Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.

Arpeggio Type ARP Type 01–100 Determines the Arpeggio type. (See the list on page 14)

Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo

1 (Original),

2 (Thru)

Sets the velocity mode for arpeggio playback.

Style File Load Sff Load 001–nnn Loads a Style ﬁle.

PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 89).

Local On/Off Local ON/OFF

Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone

generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 88)

External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF

Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock

(OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 88)

Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF

Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is

transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).

Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF

Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)

during Style playback.

Song Out SongOut ON/OFF

Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)

during Song playback.

Initial Send InitSend YES/NO

Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to

send, or press [-] to cancel.

Time Signature

Numerator

TimesigN 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

Time Signature

Denominator

TimesigD

Half note,

Quarter note,

Eighth note,

Sixteenth note

Sets the length of each metronome beat.

Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

Lesson Track (R) R-Part

GuideTrack

1–16

Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The

setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a

computer.

Lesson Track (L) L-Part

GuideTrack

1–16

Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting

is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer.

Grade Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off.

Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF

Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to

ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/PC] button is

pressed.

Sleep Sleep 3–20, OFF Sets the amount of time before the instrument will go into Sleep Mode.

Setting Item title Range/Settings Description

86 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Connecting to a Computer

Nearly all of the electronic musical instruments made today—particularly synthesizers,

sequencers and computer music related devices—use MIDI. MIDI is a worldwide stan-

dard that allows these devices to send and receive performance and setting data. Natu-

rally, this instrument lets you save or send your keyboard performance as MIDI data, as

well as the songs, styles and panel settings.

The potential MIDI holds for your live performances and music creation/production is

enormous—simply by connecting this instrument to a computer and transmitting MIDI

data. In this section, you’ll learn the basics of MIDI and the speciﬁc MIDI functions pro-

vided by this instrument.

No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic

instrument” and “digital instrument”. In the world

today, these are the two main categories of instru-

ments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical

guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They

are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a

key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and

plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a

string and the note sounds. But how does a digital

instrument go about playing a note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic

instrument the sampling note (previously recorded

note) stored in the tone generator section (elec-

tronic circuit) is played based on information

received from the keyboard. So then what is the

information from the keyboard that becomes the

basis for note production?

For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note

using the grand piano sound on the instrument.

Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a reso-

nated note, the electronic instrument puts out infor-

mation from the keyboard such as “with what

voice”, “with which key”, “about how strong”,

“when was it pressed”, and “when was it released”.

Then each piece of information is changed into a

number value and sent to the tone generator. Using

these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays

the stored sampling note.

Example of Keyboard Information

Your keyboard performance and all panel opera-

tions of this instrument are processed as MIDI

data. The songs, auto accompaniment (styles), and

User songs are also made up of MIDI data.

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instru-

ment Digital Interface and it allows different musi-

cal instruments and devices to instantly

communicate with each other, via digital data. The

MIDI standard is used all over the world and was

designed to transmit performance data between

electronic musical instruments (or computers).

Thanks to MIDI, you can control one instrument

from another and transmit performance data

between the devices-taking your creative and per-

formance potential to even higher levels.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups:

Channel messages and System messages.

What Is MIDI?

● Acoustic guitar note production

Pluck a string and the body

resonates the sound.

● Digital instrument note production

Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note

stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers.

Playing the keyboard

Tone Generator

(Electronic circuit)

Sampling

Note

Sampling

Note

Voice number (with what voice) 1 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed) and

note off (when was it released)

Timing expressed

numerically (quarter note)

Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)

Connecting to a Computer

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 87

● Channel Messages

This instrument is capable of handling 16 MIDI

channels simultaneously—meaning it can play up

to sixteen different instruments at the same time.

Channel messages transmit information such as

Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16

channels.

● System Messages

This is data that is used in common by the entire

MIDI system. System messages include messages

like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique

to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime

Messages that control the MIDI device.

The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer.

● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 88).

● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 90).

The connection procedure is as follows:

Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com-

puter.

The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM.

Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on

page 93.

Connect the USB terminal of the computer

to the USB terminal on the instrument using

an AB type USB cable (USB cable sold sep-

arately).

The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft

Downloader application that allows you to transfer

song ﬁles from your computer to the instrument’s

ﬂash memory. For instructions about how to install

Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song

ﬁles, see page 91.

■ Precautions when using the USB termi-

nal

When connecting the computer to the USB termi-

nal, make sure to observe the following points.

Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and

corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the

instrument freezes, restart the application software

or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instru-

ment off then on again.

Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF

Performance data of the keyboard (contains

note number and velocity data)

Program Change

Instrument selection (including bank select

MSB/LSB, if necessary)

Control Change Instrument settings (volume, pan, etc.)

Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting

Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus settings, etc.

Realtime Messages Start/stop operation

Connecting a Personal Computer

USB cable

PSR-E413

• Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.

• Before connecting the computer to the USB terminal, exit from

any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended,

sleep, standby).

• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the com-

puter to the USB terminal.

•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument

on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB ter-

minal.

• Quit any open application software on the computer.

• Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instru-

ment. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard

or play back a song, etc.)

• While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should

wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when

turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when

alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

CAUTION

88 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Connecting to a Computer

By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the com-

puter, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument.

● When the instrument is connected with computer,

it transmits/receives performance data.

■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to select the item you want to change its

value.

Use the dial to select ON or OFF.

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer

USB cable

USB terminalUSB terminal

PSR-E413

Item Range/Settings Description

Local ON/OFF

Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal

tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when

local control is off.

External Clock ON/OFF

These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to

a clock signal from an external device (ON).

Keyboard Out ON/OFF

These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or

not (OFF).

Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback.

Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback.

• If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this may be the

most likely cause.

CAUTION

• If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from

an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will

not start.

CAUTION

Connecting to a Computer

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 89

■PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A number of MIDI settings need to be made when

you want to transfer performance data between the

computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item

can conveniently make multiple settings for you in

one operation. Three settings are available: PC1,

PC2, and OFF.

This setting is not necessary when transferring

song or backup ﬁles between the computer and the

instrument.

* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Note-

book.

Press and hold the [DEMO/PC] button

for longer than a second so that the PC

Mode item appears.

Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF.

You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on

your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the

panel.

■Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To use the remote control functions, simulta-

neously hold down the lowest two keys on the key-

board (C1 and C#1) and press the appropriate key

(shown below).

PC1 PC2* OFF

Local OFF OFF ON

External Clock ON OFF OFF

Song Out OFF OFF OFF

Style Out OFF OFF OFF

Keyboard Out OFF ON ON

oFF

PC mode

• When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo,

song recording, and lesson features cannot be used.

NOTE

•You can also access the PC Mode item by ﬁrst pressing the [FUNC-

TION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to

locate it (page 83).

NOTE

Remote Control of MIDI Devices

C#1

C6: Fast forward

B5: Start

A5: Stop

G5: Rewind

F5: Top (move to the beginning

of the song)

E5: Metronome ON/OFF

• Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2

mode.

NOTE

90 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Connecting to a Computer

This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a

sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to ﬁrst send and record the panel setup

data before the actual performance data.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY

[] and [ ]

buttons

to select the Initial Send item.

Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO]

to cancel.

Songs, styles, or Music Database ﬁles residing on a

computer or the supplied CD-ROM, can be trans-

ferred to the instrument. Backup ﬁles can also be

transferred from the instrument to the computer

and back.

In order to transfer ﬁles between your computer

and the instrument you will need to install the

Musicsoft Downloader application and the USB-

MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM

on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CD-

ROM Installation Guide on page 93 for installation

details.

■With the Musicsoft

Downloader You Can.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● Transfer ﬁles from the computer to the instru-

ment’s ﬂash memory.

⇒ refer to the procedure described on

page 91.

The procedure for transferring songs included

on the Accessory CD-ROM from your com-

puter to the instrument is given as an example.

Initial Send

Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument

● Data that can be transferred from a com-

puter to this instrument.

• Data Capacity: 373 KB

256 ﬁles total for the Song, Style and

Music Database.

• Data Format

Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1

Style: (.sty)

Music Database: (.mfd)

Backup File: 08PK61.bup

● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)?

The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the

most common and widely compatible sequence

formats used for storing sequence data. There are

two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large

number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF

Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI

sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0.

Connecting to a Computer

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 91

● Backup ﬁles can be transferred from the instru-

ment to a computer and back.

⇒ refer to the procedure described on

page 92.

■Use Musicsoft Downloader

To Transfer Songs From the

Accessory CD-ROM To the

Instrument’s ﬂash memory

● ● ● ● ●

Install the Musicsoft Downloader and

USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then

connect the computer and the instru-

ment (page 95).

Insert the included CD-ROM into the

CD-ROM drive.

A start window will appear automatically.

Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader

shortcut icon that is created on the

desktop.

This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader

application and the main window will appear.

Click the “Add File” button and the Add

File window will appear.

Click the button to the right of “Look in”

and select the CD-ROM drive from the drop-

down menu that appears. Double-click the

“SampleData” Folder on the window. Select

the ﬁle from the “SongData” Folder you

want to transfer to the instrument, and click

“Open”.

At this point you can select a Style or Music Data-

base ﬁle on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer

it to the instrument in the same way as a song ﬁle.

A copy of the selected MIDI song ﬁle

will appear in the “List of ﬁles stored

temporarily” at the top of the window.

The memory medium will also be displayed at

the bottom of the window to specify the desti-

nation for the transfer. Click the “Electronic

Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash mem-

ory.”

Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with

Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher.

• If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding.

NOTE

• The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader

is running.

NOTE

q Click the CD-ROM drive

w Double-click “SampleData” Folder

→ “SongData” Folder, and click a

song ﬁle.

e Click “Open”

q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”,

and then “Flash Memory”

92 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Connecting to a Computer

After selecting the ﬁle in the “List of

ﬁles stored temporarily”, click the

downward [Move] button and a conﬁr-

mation message will appear. Click [OK]

and the song will be transferred from

the “List of ﬁles stored temporarily” to

the instrument’s memory.

Close the window to end the Musicsoft

Downloader.

To playback a song stored in ﬂash

memory, press the [SONG] button.

Use the dial to select the song you want

to play, then press the

[] (START/

STOP)

button to start playback.

■Transfer a backup ﬁle from

the instrument to a computer

● ● ●

You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer

“Backup Files” containing backup data (page 56),

including the ﬁve User Songs stored on the instru-

ment, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musi-

cal Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader

display, and then “System Drive”, a ﬁle named

“08PK61.bup” will appear in the lower right corner

of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is the

backup ﬁle. For details about how to transmit

backup ﬁle using the Musicsoft Downloader appli-

cation, refer to the Online help “Transferring Data

Between the Computer and Instrument (for unpro-

tected data)” in the application.

● To Use transferred Songs For Lessons...

In order to use songs (only SMF format 0)

transferred from a computer for lessons it is

necessary to specify which channels are to be

played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts.

1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song

(036–) residing in ﬂash memory for which you

want to set the guide track.

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to

select the R-Part or L-Part item.

4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to

play back as the speciﬁed right- or left-hand

part.

We recommend that you select channel 1 for the

right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.

• End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the ﬁle transferred from

your computer.

NOTE

• Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only

will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the

memory media may become unstable and its contents may dis-

appear completely when the power is turned on or off.

CAUTION

• Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or

improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a

copy of all important data stored on your computer.

•We recommend that you use a power adaptor rather than bat-

teries when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the

batteries fail during the transfer.

CAUTION

• Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument.

NOTE

• The backup data, including the ﬁve User Songs is transmitted/

received as a single ﬁle. As a result, all backup data will be over-

written every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when

transferring data.

CAUTION

• Do not rename the backup ﬁle on the computer. If you do so, it will

not be recognized when transferred to the instrument.

CAUTION

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 93

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

• The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.

• Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon

breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of

this manual before installing the application.)

• Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden

without the written consent of the manufacturer.

•Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and can-

not be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software.

• This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.).

Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer.

• Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in speciﬁcations and functions will be

announced separately.

• The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different

from the screens which appear on your computer.

● Data Types

This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 95 for software installation instructions.

● Operating System (OS)

The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems.

SPECIAL NOTICES

Important Notices about the CD-ROM

• Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on any playback device other

than a computer. The resulting high-volume noise may cause hear-

ing damage or damage to the playback device.

CAUTION

94 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer.

You can download the Adobe Reader. Please check the following URL: http://www.adobe.com/

■Using the CD-ROM ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Please read the Software License Agreement on

page 121 before opening the CD-ROM package.

Check the system requirements to

make sure that the software will run on

your computer.

Insert the included CD-ROM into the

CD-ROM drive.

The start window should appear automatically.

Install the USB-MIDI driver to the com-

puter.

Refer to “Installing the USB-MIDI Driver” on

page 95 for installation and setup instructions.

Connect the instrument to the com-

puter.

The connection procedure is described on page

87.

Install the software.

Musicsoft Downloader:

See page 97.

Launch the software.

For further software operation refer to the online

help supplied with the software.

Refer to the “Troubleshooting” on page 98 when

you have trouble with installing the driver.

CD-ROM Contents

Folder Name Application / Data Name Contents

MSD_ Musicsoft Downloader

This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet

and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory.

DMN_ Digital Music Notebook

Digital Music Notebook is a combination music learning program and

online service that makes it easy and fun to practice and master your

favorite songs.

You can use the convenient and powerful Digital Music Notebook functions

with the demo song after installing Digital Music Notebook.

DMN_FlashDemo

Digital Music Notebook

Flash Demo

Full motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital

Music Notebook.

SongBook Song Book

Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as

well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs

1–11, 16, 20 and song 30 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11

are provided in this manual beginning on page 100.

USBdrv2k_

USB-MIDI Driver

(Windows 2000/XP)

This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer

via USB.

USBdrvVista_

USB-MIDI Driver

(Windows Vista/XP x64)

SampleData

SongData MIDI 70 songs

These songs, styles, or music database can be transferred to the

instrument and played or used with the instrument functions.

StyleData 5 style ﬁles

MDB 5 music database ﬁles

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 95

■

Installing the USB-MIDI Driver

● ● ● ●

In order to be able to communicate with and use

MIDI devices connected to your computer, the

appropriate driver software must be properly

installed on your computer.

The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software

and similar applications on your computer to trans-

mit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI

devices via a USB cable.

•Windows 2000 installation ➔ page 96.

•Windows XP installation ➔ page 96.

•Windows Vista installation ➔ page 97

System Requirements

Application/Data OS CPU Memory Hard Disk Display

Musicsoft Downloader

Windows 2000/XP Home

Edition/XP Professional/

Vista

* Only 32-bit is supported.

233 MHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

Processor family

(500 MHz or higher is

recommended)

64 MB or more

(256 MB or more

is recommended)

at least 128 MB of

free space (at least

512 MB of free

space is

recommended)

800 x 600

HighColor

(16-bit)

USB Driver for Windows

2000/XP

Windows 2000/XP Home

Edition/XP Professional

166 MHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

Processor family

32 MB or more

(64 MB or more is

recommended)

at least 3 MB of free

space

—

USB Driver for Windows

Vista/XP x64

Windows Vista/XP

Professional x64 Edition

800 MHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

Processor family or Intel

64 compatible processor

512 MB or more

at least 3 MB of free

space

—

Digital Music Notebook

Windows XP Home/

Professional Edition,

Service Pack 1a (SP1a)

more/Windows Vista

* Only 32-bit is supported.

400 MHz or higher

processor clock speed

(Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

Processor family, or

compatible processor

recommended)

128 MB or more

(256 MB or more

is recommended)

at least 150 MB of

free space

1024 x 768

HighColor

(16-bit)

Digital Music Notebook

(Requirements for

playing content with

video included.)

Windows 2000/XP Home

Edition/XP Professional/

Vista

* Only 32-bit is supported.

1 GHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

Processor family (1.4 GHz

or more is recommended)

256 MB or more

Software Installation

● Uninstall (Removing the Software)

Installed software can be removed from your

computer as follows:

From the Windows Start menu select Start →

Settings → Control panel → Add or Remove

Applications → Install and Uninstall. Select the

item you want to remove and click [Add or

Remove]. Follow the on-screen instructions to

remove the selected software.

• The actual names of the menu items and buttons will depend on

the OS version you are using.

NOTE

Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you

will be using (D:, E:, Q: etc.) The drive name is

displayed beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My

Computer” folder. The root directory of the CD-

ROM drive will be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively.

Driver

USB

Cable

MIDI device

Computer

Sequence

software

96 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Installing the driver on Windows 2000

Start the computer and use the “Adminis-

trator” account to log on to Windows

2000.

Select [My Computer] ➔ [Control Panel]

➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Sign-

ing] ➔ [File Signature Veriﬁcation], and

check the radio button to the left of

“Ignore—Install all ﬁles, regardless of ﬁle

signature” and click [OK].

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-

ROM drive. A start window will appear

automatically.

First, make sure the POWER switch on

the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a

USB cable to connect the MIDI device to

the computer. After making the connec-

tions, turn on the power of the MIDI

device. The system automatically

launches the Found New Hardware Wiz-

ard. Click [Next]. (Some computers may

take a while to display the Wizard win-

dow.)

Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the

“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” sec-

tion of the Owner’s Manual.

Select the radio button for “Search for a

suitable driver for my device [recom-

mended]”, then click [Next].

Check the “CD-ROM drives” check box,

deselect all other check boxes, then click

[Next].

Deselect the “Install one of the other driv-

ers”, then click [Next].

When the installation is complete, the

Wizard displays “Completing the Found

New Hardware Wizard”.

Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a

while to display the Wizard window.)

Restart the computer.

The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.

Installing the driver on Windows XP

Start the computer and use the “Adminis-

trator” account to log on to Windows XP.

Select [Start] ➔ [Control Panel]. If the

control panel appears as “Pick a cate-

gory”, click “Switch to Classic View” in

the upper left of the window. All control

panels and icons will be displayed.

Go to [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver

Signing Options] and check the radio but-

ton to the left of “Ignore” and click [OK].

Click the [OK] button to close System

Properties, and then click “X” in the upper

right of the window to close the Control

Panel.

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-

ROM drive. A start window will appear

automatically.

First, make sure the POWER switch on

the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a

USB cable to connect the MIDI device to

the computer. After making the connec-

tions, turn on the power of the MIDI

device. The system launches the Found

New Hardware Wizard automatically. Oth-

erwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the

“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”

section of the Owner’s Manual. If the sys-

tem displays “Found New Hardware” in

the lower right corner, wait until Wizard

window is displayed. (Some computers

may take a while to display the window.)

If the Wizard window prompts you to specify

whether or not to connect to Windows Update,

select the radio button for “No, not this time”,

then click [Next].

Select the radio button for “Install the

software automatically (recommended)”,

then click [Next].

When the installation is complete, the

Wizard displays “Completing the Found

New Hardware Wizard”.

Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a

while to display the Wizard window.)

Restart the computer.

If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in

the lower right corner, wait until the Wizard win-

dow is displayed. (Some computers may take a

while to display the Wizard window.)

The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.

• If the system prompts you to insert the Windows CD-ROM during

detection of the drivers, point to the “USBdrv2k_” folder (e.g.,

D:\USBdrv2k_) and continue the installation.

NOTE

• If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to

install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature”, click [Yes].

NOTE

• If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Win-

dows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP”, click

[Continue Anyway].

NOTE

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 97

When using Windows XP Professional

x64 Edition, the Support Module must

be installed.

After installing the USB-MIDI drivers for all the

connected USB devices, select “My Computer”

from the Start menu. Right-click the CD-ROM

icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu.

Select “USBdrvVista_” →

“XPx64SupportModule” → “Setup.exe” and

launch “Setup.exe.” Follow the onscreen direc-

tions.

Installing the driver in Windows Vista

Start the computer and use the “Adminis-

trator” account to log on to Windows Vista.

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-

ROM drive. A start window will appear

automatically.

First, make sure the POWER switch on

the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a

USB cable to connect the MIDI device to

the computer. After making the connec-

tions, turn on the power of the MIDI

device. The system automatically

launches the “Found New Hardware” win-

dow. Click “Locate and install driver soft-

ware (recommended)”.

Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the

“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” sec-

tion of the Owner’s Manual. (Some computers

may take a while to display the window.).

If a message allowing Windows to search

online for driver software appears, click

“Don’t search online.”

If a message prompting you to insert the

disk that came with your device appears,

click [Next].

The system starts the installation.

When the installation is complete, the

system displays the message “The soft-

ware for this device has been success-

fully installed.” Click [Close].

(Some computers may take a while to display the

window.)

The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.

■Installing the Musicsoft

Downloader and Digital

Music Notebook Applications

● ● ●

Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your

computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start win-

dow will appear automatically showing

software applications.

Click [Musicsoft Downloader] or [Digital

Music Notebook].

Click the [install] button, and follow the

on-screen instructions to install the soft-

ware.

For Digital Music Notebook operating instruc-

tions see the help menu: launch the Digital Music

Notebook application and click “Help”.

For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions

see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft

Downloader application and click “Help”.

*You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft

Downloader at the following Internet URL.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

• This Wizard window will not appear when using Windows XP Pro-

fessional x64 Edition. There is no need to restart the computer.

NOTE

• Once the Support Module is installed, this step is not necessary,

even if you’ve connected a new USB device or updated the USB-

MIDI driver.

NOTE

• If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue].

NOTE

• If the “Windows Security” window appears, conﬁrm this software is

authored by Yamaha Corporation then click [Install].

NOTE

•You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order

to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows

2000, XP or Vista.

•You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order

to install Digital Music Notebook on a computer running Windows

XP or Vista.

IMPORTANT

• When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that Inter-

net Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your computer.

IMPORTANT

• Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music Note-

book content. Credit card processing may not be possible for

some areas, so please check with your local authorities to make

sure that your credit card can be used.

IMPORTANT

• Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBEL-

IUSSCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully

agrees to when using the application. Please read carefully the

AGREEMENT at the end of this manual before using the application.

NOTE

• If the start window does not appear automatically, double click your

“My Computer” folder to open it. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and

select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Double click “Start.exe” and

proceed to step 2, below.

NOTE

• Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer ﬁles between

this instrument and a computer. No other ﬁle transfer application

can be used.

IMPORTANT

98 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

■Troubleshooting

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?

Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the

USB cable, then connect it again.

• Is the USB function enabled on your computer?

When you connect the instrument to the computer for

the ﬁrst time, if the “Add New Hardware Wizard”

does not appear, the USB function on the computer

may be disabled. Perform the following steps.

1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔

[Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Win-

dows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] ➔

[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista).

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear

at “Universal serial bus controller” or

“USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x”

mark, the USB controller is disabled.

• Is any unknown device registered?

If driver installation fails, the instrument will be

marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will not be

able to install the driver. Delete the “Unknown

device” by following the steps below.

1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔

[Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Win-

dows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] ➔

[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista).

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu

“View devices by type”.

3 If you ﬁnd “Other devices”, double-click it

to extend the tree to look for “Unknown

device”. If one appears, select it and click

the [Remove] button.

4 Remove the USB cable from the instru-

ment, and make the connection again.

5 Install the driver again.

•Windows 2000 users........ see page 96

•Windows XP users........... see page 96

•Windows Vista users ....... see page 97

• Did you install the driver? (page 95)

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?

•Are the volume settings of the instrument, play-

back device, and application program set to the

appropriate levels?

•Have you selected an appropriate port in the

sequence software?

•Are you using the latest USB-MIDI driver? The

latest driver can be downloaded from the following

web site.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

• Does your computer satisfy the system require-

ments?

• Is any other application or device driver running?

• Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI

application is running.

You may not be able to suspend/resume normally,

depending on the particular environment (USB Host

Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and

connecting the USB cable will allow you to use the

instrument functions again.

[Windows 2000/XP/Vista]

1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis-

trator” account to log on Windows.

Close all applications and windows that are open.

2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-

ROM drive.

3 Select “My Computer” from the Start

menu.

4 Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select

“Open” from the pop-up menu.

5 Select “USBdrvVista_” or “USBdrv2k_”

folder

➔

“uninstall” folder

➔

“uninstall.exe” ﬁle and launch

“uninstall.exe.” ﬁle.

Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the

driver.

6 A message asking you to restart your

computer in order to complete the

uninstall procedure will appear.

Driver removal will be complete when you have

restarted your computer.

The driver cannot be installed.

When controlling the instrument from

your computer via USB, the instrument

does not operate correctly or no sound

is heard.

Playback response is delayed.

Cannot suspend or resume the

computer correctly.

How can I remove the driver?

• When using a 64-bit OS, click “uninstall_x64.exe.” from

“USBdrvVista_” folder.

NOTE

• If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue].

NOTE

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 99

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced.

Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interfer-

ence. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the

instrument.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or

when a song or style is being played back.

Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear

panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output.

Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 88.)

Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard

does not produce any sound.

When using the Dictionary function (page 77), the keys in the right hand area

are used only for entering the chord root and type.

• The volume is too soft.

• The sound quality is poor.

• The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play.

• The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-

rectly.

• The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel

settings are reset.

The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new

ones, or use the optional AC adaptor.

The style or song does not play back when the

[START/STOP] button is pressed.

Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to

“External Clock” on page 88.

The style does not sound properly.

Make sure that the Style Volume (page 84) is set to an appropriate level.

Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing? Set the

split point at an appropriate key (page 72).

Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the

[ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.

No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/

STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number

141 or a style between 153 and 165 (Pianist).

This is not a malfunction. Style number 141 and style numbers 153–165 (Pia-

nist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin

playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if

style playback is turned on.

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound

seems to be cut off.

The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or

Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time,

some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or

song.

Some notes don’t sound when playing multiple notes

simultaneously on the keyboard, or some notes don’t

sound when playing arpeggios.

You have exceeded 32 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyphony

(the maximum number of notes that can be played simultaneously) of the

instrument. The instrument will play normally as long as no more than 32 notes

are being played at once, both on the keyboard and by any automatic playback

functions.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the

opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch

cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is

properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.

The sound of the voice changes from note to note.

This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings

(samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual

sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.

The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played.

Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on.

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off.

The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the

[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button ﬁrst when you are

going to use any style-related function.

There is no harmony sound.

The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types

01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompani-

ment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range.

Types 06–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 06 = 12

you need to play two notes at the same time.

No sound is produced for about two seconds after the

instrument wakes from sleep mode.

This is normal. The speakers are muted for about two seconds, until the instru-

ment wakes fully from the sleep mode.

Appendix

100 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Scores

This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece.

Hallelujah Chorus

Song No. 9 qq

=123

(Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger)

Scores

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 101

Scores

102 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-

ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the

part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.

Ave Maria

Song No. 10 qq

=61

(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)

Repeatedly Play the Same Key.

P.A.T.

Your Turn.

Type =CHORD

Scores

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 103

Scores

104 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-

ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the

part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.

Nocturne op.9-2

Song No. 11 qq

=108

(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)

P.A.T.

You Can Even Play the Same Keys!

Type =CHORD

Scores

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 105

106 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Voice List

■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means

that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regard-

less of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a

number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment

is used the total number of available notes for playing on the

keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the

Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is

exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most

recent notes have priority (last note priority).

● Panel Voice List

• The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for

each voice. Use these program change numbers when

playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device.

• Program change numbers are often speciﬁed as numbers

“0–127.” Since this list uses a “1–128” numbering system,

in such cases it is necessary to subtract 1 from the trans-

mitted program change numbers to select the appropriate

sound: e.g. to select No. 2 in the list, transmit program

change number 1.

• Some voices may sound continuously or have a long

decay after the notes have been released while the sus-

tain pedal (footswitch) is held.

NOTE

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PIANO

10112 1 Grand Piano

20112 2 Bright Piano

30112 7 Harpsichord

40112 4 Honky-tonk Piano

50112 3 MIDI Grand Piano

60113 3 CP 80

E.PIANO

70114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano

80113 6 Hyper Tines

90112 5 Funky Electric Piano

10 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano

11 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano

12 0 112 8 Clavi

ORGAN

13 0 118 19 Cool! Organ

14 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ

15 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1

16 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2

17 0 112 19 Rock Organ

18 0 114 19 Purple Organ

19 0 112 18 Click Organ

20 0 116 17 Bright Organ

21 0 127 19 Theater Organ

22 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ

23 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ

24 0 113 20 Chapel Organ

25 0 112 20 Church Organ

26 0 112 21 Reed Organ

ACCORDION

27 0 112 22 Musette Accordion

28 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion

29 0 113 24 Bandoneon

30 0 113 23 Modern Harp

31 0 112 23 Harmonica

GUITAR

32 0 112 25 Classical Guitar

33 0 112 26 Folk Guitar

34 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar

35 0 117 28 60’s Clean Guitar

36 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar

37 0 112 28 Clean Guitar

38 0 113 27 Octave Guitar

39 0 112 29 Muted Guitar

40 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar

41 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar

BASS

42 0 112 34 Finger Bass

43 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass

44 0 112 35 Pick Bass

45 0 112 36 Fretless Bass

46 0 112 37 Slap Bass

47 0 112 39 Synth Bass

48 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass

49 0 113 40 Dance Bass

STRINGS

50 0 112 49 String Ensemble

51 0 112 50 Chamber Strings

52 0 113 50 Slow Strings

53 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings

54 0 112 51 Synth Strings

55 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings

56 0 112 41 Violin

57 0 112 43 Cello

58 0 112 44 Contrabass

59 0 112 47 Harp

60 0 112 106 Banjo

61 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit

CHOIR

62 0 112 53 Choir

63 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble

64 0 112 55 Air Choir

65 0 112 54 Vox Humana

SAXOPHONE

66 0 117 67 Sweet! Tenor Sax

67 0 113 65 Sweet! Soprano Sax

68 0 112 67 Tenor Sax

69 0 112 66 Alto Sax

70 0 112 65 Soprano Sax

71 0 112 68 Baritone Sax

72 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax

73 0 112 72 Clarinet

74 0 112 69 Oboe

75 0 112 70 English Horn

76 0 112 71 Bassoon

TRUMPET

77 0 115 57 Sweet! Trumpet

78 0 112 57 Trumpet

79 0 112 58 Trombone

80 0 113 58 Trombone Section

81 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet

82 0 112 61 French Horn

83 0 112 59 Tuba

BRASS

84 0 112 62 Brass Section

85 0 113 62 Big Band Brass

86 0 113 63 80’s Brass

87 0 119 62 Mellow Horns

88 0 114 63 Techno Brass

89 0 112 63 Synth Brass

FLUTE

90 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute

91 0 113 76 Sweet! Pan Flute

92 0 112 74 Flute

93 0 112 73 Piccolo

94 0 112 76 Pan Flute

95 0 112 75 Recorder

96 0 112 80 Ocarina

SYNTH LEAD

97 0 112 81 Square Lead

98 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 107

● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List

99 0 115 82 Analogon

100 0 119 82 Fargo

101 0 112 99 Star Dust

102 0 112 86 Voice Lead

103 0 112 101 Brightness

SYNTH PAD

104 0 112 92 Xenon Pad

105 0 112 95 Equinox

106 0 112 89 Fantasia

107 0 113 90 Dark Moon

108 0 113 101 Bell Pad

PERCUSSION

109 0 112 12 Vibraphone

110 0 112 13 Marimba

111 0 112 14 Xylophone

112 0 112 115 Steel Drums

113 0 112 9 Celesta

114 0 112 11 Music Box

115 0 112 15 Tubular Bells

116 0 112 48 Timpani

DRUM KITS

117 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1

118 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2

119 127 0 9 Room Kit

120 127 0 17 Rock Kit

121 127 0 25 Electronic Kit

122 127 0 26 Analog Kit

123 127 0 113 Dance Kit

124 127 0 33 Jazz Kit

125 127 0 41 Brush Kit

126 127 0 49 Symphony Kit

127 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1

128 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2

ARPEGGIO

129 0 112 49 Concerto

130 0 112 46 Pizzicato

131 0 112 1 Piano Ballad

132 0 96 82 Synth Sequence

133 0 117 28 Guitarist

134 0 112 37 Pauls Bass

135 0 113 39 Trance Bass

136 0 6 82 SynthChords

137 0 113 39 Acid Bass

138 0 112 8 Funky Clavi

139 0 112 18 ReggaeOrgan

140 0 112 47 Harpeggio

141 0 112 2 SalsaPIano

142 0 115 82 AnalogSequence

143 0 6 82 Sawtooth

144 0 112 1 Piano Arpeggio

145 0 112 25 Guitar Arpeggio

146 127 0 113 ClubBeat

147 127 0 1 R&B Loop

148 127 0 113 ClubAdds

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PIANO

149 0 0 1 Grand Piano

150 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP

151 0 40 1 Piano Strings

152 0 41 1 Dream

153 0 0 2 Bright Piano

154 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP

155 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano

156 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP

157 0 32 3 Detuned CP80

158 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano

159 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP

160 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

161 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP

162 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1

163 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2

164 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP

*165 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2

166 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano

167 0 0 7 Harpsichord

168 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP

169 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2

170 0 0 8 Clavi

171 0 1 8 Clavi KSP

CHROMATIC

172 0 0 9 Celesta

173 0 0 10 Glockenspiel

174 0 0 11 Music Box

175 0 64 11 Orgel

176 0 0 12 Vibraphone

177 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP

178 0 0 13 Marimba

179 0 1 13 Marimba KSP

180 0 64 13 Sine Marimba

181 0 97 13 Balimba

182 0 98 13 Log Drums

183 0 0 14 Xylophone

184 0 0 15 Tubular Bells

185 0 96 15 Church Bells

186 0 97 15 Carillon

187 0 0 16 Dulcimer

188 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2

189 0 96 16 Cimbalom

190 0 97 16 Santur

ORGAN

191 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ

192 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ

193 0 33 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 1

194 0 34 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 2

195 0 35 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 1

196 0 37 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 3

197 0 40 17 16+2'2/3

198 0 64 17 Organ Bass

199 0 65 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 2

200 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ

201 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2

202 0 0 18 Percussive Organ

203 0 24 18 70’s Percussive Organ

204 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ

205 0 33 18 Light Organ

206 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2

207 0 0 19 Rock Organ

208 0 64 19 Rotary Organ

209 0 65 19 Slow Rotary

210 0 66 19 Fast Rotary

211 0 0 20 Church Organ

212 0 32 20 Church Organ 3

213 0 35 20 Church Organ 2

214 0 40 20 Notre Dame

215 0 64 20 Organ Flute

216 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute

217 0 0 21 Reed Organ

218 0 40 21 Puff Organ

219 0 0 22 Accordion

220 0 0 23 Harmonica

221 0 32 23 Harmonica 2

222 0 0 24 Tango Accordion

223 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2

GUITAR

224 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar

225 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics

226 0 96 25 Ukulele

227 0 0 26 Steel Guitar

228 0 35 26 12-string Guitar

229 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar

230 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound

231 0 96 26 Mandolin

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

108 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

232 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar

233 0 32 27 Jazz Amp

234 0 0 28 Clean Guitar

235 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar

236 0 0 29 Muted Guitar

237 0 40 29 Funk Guitar

238 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar

239 0 45 29 Jazz Man

240 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar

241 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch

242 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar

243 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar

244 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2

245 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics

246 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback

247 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2

BASS

248 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass

249 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm

250 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass

251 0 0 34 Finger Bass

252 0 18 34 Finger Dark

253 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar

254 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass

255 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2

256 0 65 34 Modulated Bass

257 0 0 35 Pick Bass

258 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass

259 0 0 36 Fretless Bass

260 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2

261 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3

262 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4

263 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1

264 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass

265 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2

266 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap

267 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1

268 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass

269 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2

270 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass

271 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass

272 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass

273 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark

*274 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass

275 0 41 40 DX Bass

STRINGS

276 0 0 41 Violin

277 0 8 41 Slow Violin

278 0 0 42 Viola

279 0 0 43 Cello

280 0 0 44 Contrabass

281 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings

282 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings

283 0 40 45 Suspense Strings

284 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings

285 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp

286 0 40 47 Yang Chin

287 0 0 48 Timpani

ENSEMBLE

288 0 0 49 Strings 1

289 0 3 49 Stereo Strings

290 0 8 49 Slow Strings

291 0 35 49 60’s Strings

292 0 40 49 Orchestra

293 0 41 49 Orchestra 2

294 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra

295 0 45 49 Velocity Strings

296 0 0 50 Strings 2

297 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings

298 0 8 50 Legato Strings

299 0 40 50 Warm Strings

300 0 41 50 Kingdom

301 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

302 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2

303 0 0 53 Choir Aahs

304 0 3 53 Stereo Choir

305 0 32 53 Mellow Choir

306 0 40 53 Choir Strings

307 0 0 54 Voice Oohs

308 0 0 55 Synth Voice

309 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2

310 0 41 55 Choral

311 0 64 55 Analog Voice

312 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit

313 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2

314 0 64 56 Impact

BRASS

315 0 0 57 Trumpet

316 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet

317 0 0 58 Trombone

318 0 18 58 Trombone 2

319 0 0 59 Tuba

320 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet

321 0 0 61 French Horn

322 0 6 61 French Horn Solo

323 0 32 61 French Horn 2

324 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra

325 0 0 62 Brass Section

326 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section

327 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1

328 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass

329 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2

330 0 18 64 Soft Brass

331 0 41 64 Choir Brass

REED

332 0 0 65 Soprano Sax

333 0 0 66 Alto Sax

334 0 40 66 Sax Section

335 0 0 67 Tenor Sax

336 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax

337 0 0 68 Baritone Sax

338 0 0 69 Oboe

339 0 0 70 English Horn

340 0 0 71 Bassoon

341 0 0 72 Clarinet

PIPE

342 0 0 73 Piccolo

343 0 0 74 Flute

344 0 0 75 Recorder

345 0 0 76 Pan Flute

346 0 0 77 Blown Bottle

347 0 0 78 Shakuhachi

348 0 0 79 Whistle

349 0 0 80 Ocarina

SYNTH LEAD

350 0 0 81 Square Lead

351 0 6 81 Square Lead 2

352 0 8 81 LM Square

353 0 18 81 Hollow

354 0 19 81 Shroud

355 0 64 81 Mellow

356 0 65 81 Solo Sine

357 0 66 81 Sine Lead

358 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead

359 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2

360 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth

361 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth

362 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth

363 0 20 82 Big Lead

364 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog

365 0 0 83 Calliope Lead

366 0 65 83 Pure Lead

367 0 0 84 Chiff Lead

368 0 0 85 Charang Lead

369 0 64 85 Distorted Lead

370 0 0 86 Voice Lead

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 109

The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice.

371 0 0 87 Fifths Lead

372 0 35 87 Big Five

373 0 0 88 Bass & Lead

374 0 16 88 Big & Low

375 0 64 88 Fat & Perky

376 0 65 88 Soft Whirl

SYNTH PAD

377 0 0 89 New Age Pad

378 0 64 89 Fantasy

379 0 0 90 Warm Pad

380 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad

381 0 0 92 Choir Pad

382 0 66 92 Itopia

383 0 0 93 Bowed Pad

384 0 0 94 Metallic Pad

385 0 0 95 Halo Pad

386 0 0 96 Sweep Pad

SYNTH EFFECTS

387 0 0 97 Rain

388 0 65 97 African Wind

389 0 66 97 Carib

390 0 0 98 Sound Track

391 0 27 98 Prologue

392 0 0 99 Crystal

393 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp

394 0 14 99 Popcorn

395 0 18 99 Tiny Bells

396 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel

397 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes

398 0 41 99 Clear Bells

399 0 42 99 Chorus Bells

400 0 65 99 Soft Crystal

401 0 70 99 Air Bells

402 0 71 99 Bell Harp

403 0 72 99 Gamelimba

404 0 0 100 Atmosphere

405 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere

406 0 19 100 Hollow Release

407 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano

408 0 64 100 Nylon Harp

409 0 65 100 Harp Vox

410 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad

411 0 0 101 Brightness

412 0 0 102 Goblins

413 0 64 102 Goblins Synth

414 0 65 102 Creeper

415 0 67 102 Ritual

416 0 68 102 To Heaven

417 0 70 102 Night

418 0 71 102 Glisten

419 0 96 102 Bell Choir

420 0 0 103 Echoes

421 0 0 104 Sci-Fi

WORLD

422 0 0 105 Sitar

423 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar

424 0 35 105 Sitar 2

425 0 97 105 Tamboura

426 0 0 106 Banjo

427 0 28 106 Muted Banjo

428 0 96 106 Rabab

429 0 97 106 Gopichant

430 0 98 106 Oud

431 0 0 107 Shamisen

432 0 0 108 Koto

433 0 96 108 Taisho-kin

434 0 97 108 Kanoon

435 0 0 109 Kalimba

436 0 0 110 Bagpipe

437 0 0 111 Fiddle

438 0 0 112 Shanai

PERCUSSIVE

439 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

440 0 96 113 Bonang

441 0 97 113 Altair

442 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs

443 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs

444 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal

445 0 0 114 Agogo

446 0 0 115 Steel Drums

447 0 97 115 Glass Percussion

448 0 98 115 Thai Bells

449 0 0 116 Woodblock

450 0 96 116 Castanets

451 0 0 117 Taiko Drum

452 0 96 117 Gran Cassa

453 0 0 118 Melodic Tom

454 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2

455 0 65 118 Real Tom

456 0 66 118 Rock Tom

457 0 0 119 Synth Drum

458 0 64 119 Analog Tom

459 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion

460 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal

SOUND EFFECTS

461 0 0 121 Fret Noise

462 0 0 122 Breath Noise

463 0 0 123 Seashore

464 0 0 124 Bird Tweet

465 0 0 125 Telephone Ring

466 0 0 126 Helicopter

467 0 0 127 Applause

468 0 0 128 Gunshot

469 64 0 1 Cutting Noise

470 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2

471 64 0 4 String Slap

472 64 0 17 Flute Key Click

473 64 0 33 Shower

474 64 0 34 Thunder

475 64 0 35 Wind

476 64 0 36 Stream

477 64 0 37 Bubble

478 64 0 38 Feed

479 64 0 49 Dog

480 64 0 50 Horse

481 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2

482 64 0 56 Maou

483 64 0 65 Phone Call

484 64 0 66 Door Squeak

485 64 0 67 Door Slam

486 64 0 68 Scratch Cut

487 64 0 69 Scratch Split

488 64 0 70 Wind Chime

489 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2

490 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition

491 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal

492 64 0 83 Car Passing

493 64 0 84 Car Crash

494 64 0 85 Siren

495 64 0 86 Train

496 64 0 87 Jet Plane

497 64 0 88 Starship

498 64 0 89 Burst

499 64 0 90 Roller Coaster

500 64 0 91 Submarine

501 64 0 97 Laugh

502 64 0 98 Scream

503 64 0 99 Punch

504 64 0 100 Heartbeat

505 64 0 101 Footsteps

506 64 0 113 Machine Gun

507 64 0 114 Laser Gun

508 64 0 115 Explosion

509 64 0 116 Firework

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

110 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Drum Kit List

•“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.

• Each percussion voice uses one note.

• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in

“117: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).

•Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.

•Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to

be played alternately with each other.)

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Voice No. 117 118 119 120 121 122

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

assign

Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Snare Roll 2

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy

Snare Snappy Electro

Snare Noisy 4

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2

46 A# 134A# 0Open Rim Shot

Open Rim Shot H Short

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Tight Short Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Analog Short

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Short Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Analog

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Snare Rock Rim Snare Noisy 3 Snare Analog 2

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 Tom Analog 1

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Closed Analog

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Analog 2

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal

Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Analog 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Analog

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 Tom Analog 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 Tom Analog 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Tom Analog 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3Maracas Maracas 2

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L

85 C# 573C# 4Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L 2 Scratch L 3

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

Drum Kit List

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 111

Voice No. 117 123 124 125 126 127 128

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/001 126/000/002

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

assign

Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Techno Q Kick Soft 2

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Rim Gate

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Techno L Gran Cassa

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Small Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Door Slam

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Scratch H 3

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Analog 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Wind Chime

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Closed Analog3

Telephone Ring 2

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Analog 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal

Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Analog 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Open Analog 2

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Analog 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Analog 5 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog Hand Cymbal

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Analog 6 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

Hand Cymbal Short

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Car Passing

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Car Crash

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog Siren

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Train

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap Jet Plane

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

Hand Cymbal 2 Short

Starship

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Burst

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L Roller Coaster

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H Submarine

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Shower Laugh

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Thunder Scream

82 A# 470A# 3Maracas Maracas 2 Wind Punch

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H Stream Heartbeat

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L Bubble Footsteps

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Feed

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L 3

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun

97 C# 685C# 5 Horse Laser Gun

98 D 6 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion

99 D# 687D# 5 Firework

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5 Maou

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

112 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Style List

Style No. Style Name

8BEAT

1 BritRock

2 8BtModrn

3 Cool 8Bt

4 60sGtPop

5 8BtAdria

6 60s8Beat

7 BblgumPp

8 BritPpSw

9 8Beat

10 Off Beat

11 60s Rock

12 HardRock

13 RockShfl

14 8Bt Rock

16BEAT

15 16Beat

16 PopShf 1

17 PopShf 2

18 Gtr Pop

19 16Bt Up

20 KoolShfl

21 JazzRock

22 HH Light

BALLAD

23 PianoBld

24 LoveSong

25 68Modern

26 68SlowRk

27 68OrcBld

28 OrganBld

29 Pop Bld

30 16Bld 1

31 16Bld 2

DANCE

32 ClubBeat

33 Electron

34 FunkyHse

35 ChartR&B

36 MellowHH

37 SoulR&B

38 Chillout

39 EuTrance

40 Ibiza

41 DreamDnc

42 NewHipHp

43 Pop R&B

44 TrancPop

45 ChartPop

46 HouseMsk

47 Swing H

48 TcnPolis

49 Clubdanc

50 Club Ltn

51 Garage 1

52 Garage 2

53 TcnParty

54 UK Pop

55 HHGroove

56 Hip Shfl

57 HipHopPp

DISCO

58 ModDisco

59 70sDsc 1

60 70sDsc 2

61 LatinDsc

62 DscPhily

63 SatNight

64 DscChoco

65 DscHands

SWING&JAZZ

66 BB Fast

67 BBMedium

68 BBBallad

69 BB Shfl

70 AcidJazz

71 JazzClub

72 Swing 1

73 Swing 2

74 OrchSwng

75 FiveFour

76 Jazz Bld

77 Dixie

78 Ragtime

79 AfroCubn

80 Charlstn

R&B

81 Soul

82 DetPop 1

83 60s R&R

84 6/8 Soul

85 ModrnR&B

86 CroTwist

87 Rck&Roll

88 DetPop 2

89 Boogie 1

90 Boogie 2

91 6/8Blues

COUNTRY

92 Cntry8Bt

93 CntryPop

94 CntrySwg

95 CntryBld

96 Cntry2/4

97 CowboyBg

98 CntryShf

99 Blgrass

LATIN

100 BrzSamba

101 Bossa

102 PopBossa

103 Tijuana

104 DscLatin

105 Mambo

106 Salsa

107 Beguine

108 GtrRumba

109 Flamenco

110 RmbIslnd

111 Reggae

Style No. Style Name

BALLROOM

112 VienWltz

113 EngWaltz

114 Slowfox

115 Foxtrot

116 Quickstp

117 Tango

118 Pasodobl

119 Samba

120 ChaCha

121 Rumba

122 Jive

TRAD & WORLD

123 USMarch

124 6/8March

125 GerMarch

126 PolkaPop

127 OberPlka

128 Trntella

129 Showtune

130 Xmas Swg

131 XmasWltz

132 Reel

133 Hawaiian

134 Indi Pop

135 Bhangra

136 Garba

137 Goa Pop

138 Bhajan

WALTZ

139 ItalyWlz

140 MriacWlz

141 Serenade

142 SwingWlz

143 Jz Wlz 1

144 Jz Wlz 2

145 CntryWlz

146 OberWltz

147 Musette

CHILDREN

148 Learn2/4

149 Learn4/4

150 Learn6/8

151 Fun 3/4

152 Fun 4/4

PIANIST

153 Stride

154 PnoBls 1

155 PnoBls 2

156 Pno Rag

157 Pno R&R

158 PnoBoogi

159 PnoJzWlz

160 PnoJzBld

161 Arpeggio

162 Musical

163 SlowRock

164 8Pno Bld

165 PnoSwing

Style No. Style Name

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 113

Arpeggio List

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

1 UpOct

2 DownOct

3 UpDnOct

4 SynArp1

5 SynArp2

6 SynArp3

7 SynArp4

8 SyncEcho

9 PulsLine

10 StepLine

11 Random

12 Down&Up

13 SuperArp

14 AcidLine

15 TekEcho

16 VelGruv

17 Trance1

18 Trance2

19 SynChrd1

20 SynChrd2

21 Hybrid1

22 Hybrid2

23 Hybrid3

24 Hybrid4

25 PfArp1

26 PfArp2

27 PfArp3

28 PnClub1

29 PnClub2

30 PfBallad

31 PfChd8th

32 EPArp

33 PfShfl

34 PfRock

35 Clavi1

36 Clavi2

37 ChordUp

38 ChdDance

39 Salsa1

40 Salsa2

41 Reggae1

42 Reggae2

43 Reggae3

44 6/8R&B

45 Gospel

46 BlldEP

47 Strum1

48 Strum2

49 Pickin

50 GuitChd1

51 GuitChd2

52 GuitChd3

53 GuitArp

54 FngrPck1

55 FngrPck2

56 CleanGt

57 Slowfl

58 Samba1

59 Samba2

60 Harp1

61 Harp2

62 FngrBass

63 CooFunk

64 SlapBass

65 AcidBas1

66 AcidBas2

67 FunkyBs

68 ComboJaz

69 TranceBs

70 LatinBs

71 PercArp

72 Strings1

73 Strings2

74 Strings3

75 StrngDwn

76 StrngUp

77 Orchestr

78 Pizz1

79 Pizz2

80 Perc1

81 Perc2

82 R&B

83 Funk1

84 Funk2

85 HipHop

86 Trance

87 Dream

88 2 Step

89 Ibiza1

90 ClubHs1

91 ClubHs2

92 EuroTek

93 House

94 Ibiza2

95 Ibiza3

96 Garage

97 African

98 Tamb

99 Latin

100 Arabic

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

114 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Music Database List

MDB No. MDB Name

ALL TIME HITS

1 Jude Hey

2 New UK

3 MyLoving

4All OK

5 Buttercp

6 JustCall

7 CheepChp

8 Daddy’s

9 Dance?

10 GetBack

11 GtrWheel

12 HighTide

13 IWasBorn

14 Sailing

15 BluJeans

16 Holiday

17 Imagine

18 LoveMe

19 LetItBld

20 LdyMdona

21 YelowSub

22 Marriage

23 MovinOut

24 My Shell

25 NowNever

26 DoLoveMe

27 TcktRide

28 SeeClear

29 Masachus

30 Hard Day

31 USA Pie

32 Norway

33 YesterBd

MODERN POP

34 Watches

35 SoundMPH

36 Hold Us

37 Unfound

38 NeedSome

39 PrtTmLvr

40 MoonShdw

41 NikitSng

42 Sure of

43 Off Day

44 Tell Her

45 GirlsMne

46 NeedLove

POP CLASSICS

47 Standing

48 RainLaff

49 Sunshine

50 ForNamdo

51 ThankFor

52 ManPiano

53 CoinLane

54 LovesYou

55 Tmbourin

56 Alone

57 GldField

58 Raindrop

59 SultanSw

60 Life’sWk

61 TopWorld

62 WatchGrl

POP BALLAD

63 WnderLnd

64 CanIStop

65 EvryTime

66 IvoryAnd

67 TheWorld

68 LovWoman

69 Dolannes

70 Madigan

71 Paradise

72 Whisper

BALLAD

73 AllOdds

74 AtonalFl

75 Hero

76 Woman

77 RunToYou

78 LoveOfAl

79 CndleWnd

80 Cavatina

81 Cherish

82 ToLoveMe

83 YouKnow

84 Evrythng

85 EyesOfBl

86 Hello

87 BeThere

88 FlyAway

89 LoveYou

90 NeverLet

91 JustOnce

92 IfYouGo

93 SavingAl

94 InTheDrk

95 LovePwr

96 Vision

97 Beautifl

98 AllAlone

99 Opposite

100 BeHonest

101 SayYou

102 SayNthng

103 Stranger

104 OneDay

105 TheBayou

106 ThisSong

107 Distance

108 ThisWay

109 LoveGone

110 Inspirng

111 TrueColr

ROCK & ROLL

112 ShakenUp

113 Beethovn

114 HurryLov

115 BeCruel

116 Jumping

117 Countdwn

118 SuePeggy

119 Champion

120 Jailhous

121 BlueShoe

122 Rockin24

MDB No. MDB Name

123 Shouting

124 Rock&Rll

125 HonkyTnk

OLDIES

126 Daydream

127 Sumertme

128 Diana’s

129 Uptown

130 Apache

131 IGotIt

132 Tonight

133 MyPillow

134 NoRain

135 FInalDance

136 SlpnLion

137 Ghetto

138 LipsLcky

139 PrettyWm

140 TikiGtr

141 TurnThre

142 Sherry

DANCE & DISCO

143 Babylon

144 Goodbye

145 Catch22

146 DISCO

147 Survival

148 TheNavy

149 DontHide

150 Celebrat

151 LondonRU

152 10,2 Sun

153 ShakeYou

154 Believe

155 BoySumer

156 I’mSexy

157 StuffHot

SWING & JAZZ

158 Patrol

159 Charles

160 GiveLove

161 Rhythm

162 LOVE

163 LeroyBad

164 Caraban

165 Misbehav

166 Safari

167 Smiling

168 SoWhatIs

169 TimeGone

170 TasteHny

171 Sandman

172 Tunisian

173 TwoFoot

174 MyBaby

R&B

175 AsPlayed

176 BabyGrov

177 Highwy66

178 SweetCHI

179 JustU&Me

180 ManLoves

181 OurLove

182 Wish I

MDB No. MDB Name

Music Database List

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 115

COUNTRY

183 OnTheRd

184 Breathe

185 InMyMind

186 ContryHw

187 GreenGrs

188 EverNeed

189 Lonesone

190 Lucille

191 HomeRng

192 Tennesse

LATIN

193 Bananabt

194 DanceMng

195 DntWorry

196 Jamaica

197 FleaSpa

198 I’mPola

199 MamboJm

200 OneNote

201 PasoCani

202 SayNoMor

203 Beguine

204 Tijuana

205 Picture

ENTERTAINMENT

206 OnTheHil

207 Barnacle

208 Califrag

209 DadClock

210 DanceLd

211 DnceFire

212 BigCntry

213 Cabaret

214 OdeToJoy

215 Mi-Re-Do

216 MyPrince

217 Necesary

218 NoBuiz

219 NoisyOld

220 Sleigh

221 RockBasy

222 Magnifiq

223 Magnfcnt

224 SilentNt

225 Nabucco

226 Standing

227 SummerPl

228 Christms

229 Favorite

230 Tubbie

231 Turkish

232 12OClock

WALTZ & TRADITIONAL

233 Blk&Whte

234 CanCan

235 Charmain

236 Musicbox

237 Clementn

238 Doodah!

239 Dreamer

240 EnterRag

241 Birthday

242 MaryLamb

MDB No. MDB Name

243 Donald’s

244 MoonWlz

245 MoulinHt

246 Sunshine

247 PieceOf

248 GreenSlv

249 TakeFour

250 TexRose

251 ThePolka

252 Scarboro

253 Edelweis

254 AroundWd

255 Whatever

256 Yankee’s

WORLD

257 Hawaii

258 D’amor

259 ElCondor

260 GoodbyRm

261 ILandOn

262 ItalyBel

263 Cucarumb

264 Puntuali

265 Cielito

266 ItalySun

267 SantaLuc

268 Trumpetr

269 VanMass

PIANIST

270 ItalySun

271 BeGood

272 Birdland

273 BlueRose

274 Chaie’s

275 Highwy66

276 Leaves

277 Miload

278 Cabaret

279 Wonderfl

280 Imagine

281 LtleStar

282 MapleRag

283 Mi-Re-Do

284 NoBuiz

285 OhBlah

286 Charades

287 Sally’s

288 Nabucco

289 SunnyStr

290 MistyFln

291 LdnBridg

292 GrndClck

293 Importnc

294 Snowman

295 Favorite

296 SongForU

297 SugerSpn

298 ThisWay

299 WenSmile

300 ZipperD

MDB No. MDB Name

116 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM

The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data.

File Name Song Name Composer

001Nutcr.mid Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” P.I. Tchaikovsky

002Orphe.mid “Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture J. Offenbach

003Slavo.mid Slavonic Dances op.72-2 A. Dvorák

004Prima.mid La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) A. Vivaldi

005Medit.mid Méditation (Thaïs) J. Massenet

006Guill.mid Guillaume Tell G. Rossini

007Fruhl.mid Frühlingslied F. Mendelssohn

008Ungar.mid Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 J. Brahms

009Fruhl.mid Frühlingsstimmen J. Strauss II

010Dolly.mid Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening T.Oesten

011Cande.mid La Candeur J.F.Burgmüller

012Arabe.mid Arabesque J.F.Burgmüller

013Pasto.mid Pastorale J.F.Burgmüller

014Petit.mid Petite Réunion J.F.Burgmüller

015Innoc.mid Innocence J.F.Burgmüller

016Progr.mid Progrès J.F.Burgmüller

017Taren.mid Tarentelle J.F.Burgmüller

018Cheva.mid La Chevaleresque J.F.Burgmüller

019Etude.mid Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” F.Chopin

020Marci.mid Marcia alla Turca L.v. Beethoven

021Turki.mid Turkish March W.A. Mozart

022Valse.mid Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” F.Chopin

023Menue.mid Menuett L. Boccherini

024Momen.mid Moments Musicaux op.94-3 F. Schubert

025Enter.mid The Entertainer S. Joplin

026Prelu.mid Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) J.S. Bach

027Violl.mid La Viollette L.Streabbog

028Angel.mid Angels Serenade Traditional

029Saraf.mid Krasnyj Sarafan Traditional

030Ameri.mid America the Beautiful S.A. Ward

031Brown.mid Little Brown Jug Traditional

032Lomon.mid Loch Lomond Traditional

033Bonni.mid My Bonnie Traditional

034Londo.mid Londonderry Air Traditional

035Banjo.mid Ring de Banjo S.C. Foster

036Vogle.mid Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Traditional

037Lorel.mid Die Lorelei F. Silcher

038Funic.mid Funiculi Funicula L. Denza

039Turke.mid Turkey in the Straw Traditional

040Campt.mid Camptown Races S.C. Foster

041Jingl.mid Jingle Bells J.S. Pierpont

042Muss.mid Muss i denn F. Silcher

043Liebe.mid Liebesträume Nr.3 F. Liszt

044Jesu.mid Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring J.S. Bach

045Joy.mid Ode to Joy L.v. Beethoven

046Pearl.mid Pearl Fisher G. Bizet

047Gavot.mid Gavotte F.J. Gossec

048Seren.mid Serenade/Haydn F.J. Haydn

049Menue.mid Menuett BWV. Anh.114 J.S. Bach

050Canon.mid Canon in D J. Pachelbel

051Vogel.mid Der Vogelfänger Bin Ich Ja “Die zauberflöte” W.A. Mozart

052Piano.mid Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” L.v. Beethoven

053Surpr.mid The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 F.J. Haydn

054WildR.mid To a Wild Rose E.A. MacDowell

055Chans.mid Chanson du Toreador G. Bizet

056Babbi.mid O Mio Babbino Caro G. Puccini

057RowRo.mid Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) Traditional

058Smoky.mid On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) Traditional

059WeWis.mid We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Traditional

060ImMai.mid Im Mai (DUET) Traditional

061Chris.mid O Christmas Tree (DUET) Traditional

062MaryH.mid Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Traditional

063TenLi.mid Ten Little Indians (DUET) S. Winner

064PopGo.mid Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Traditional

065Twink.mid Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Traditional

066Close.mid Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) J.J. Rousseau

067Cucko.mid The Cuckoo (DUET) Traditional

068Augus.mid O du lieber Augustin (DUET) Traditional

069Londo.mid London Bridge (DUET) Traditional

070Three.mid Three Blind Mice (DUET) Traditional

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 117

Effect Type List

● Harmony Types

● Reverb Types

● Chorus Types

No. Harmony Type Description

01 Duet

Harmony types 01–05 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the sin-

gle-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the

auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing

songs that contain chord data.

02 Trio

03 Block

04 Country

05 Octave

06 Trill 1/4 note

Types 6–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in

time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompani-

ment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo set-

ting (page 27). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect

precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets,

1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets.

• The Trill effect Types (06–12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two

notes are held.

• The Tremolo effect Types (13–19) repeat all held notes (up to four).

• The Echo effect Types (20–26) create delayed repeats of each note played.

07 Trill 1/6 note

08 Trill 1/8 note

09 Trill 1/12 note

10 Trill 1/16 note

11 Trill 1/24 note

12 Trill 1/32 note

13 Tremolo 1/4 note

14 Tremolo 1/6 note

15 Tremolo 1/8 note

16 Tremolo 1/12 note

17 Tremolo 1/16 note

18 Tremolo 1/24 note

19 Tremolo 1/32 note

20 Echo 1/4 note

21 Echo 1/6 note

22 Echo 1/8 note

23 Echo 1/12 note

24 Echo 1/16 note

25 Echo 1/24 note

26 Echo 1/32 note

No. Reverb Type Description

01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb.

04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb.

06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.

08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.

10 Off No effect.

No. Chorus Type Description

01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

03–04 Flanger 1–2 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.

05 Off No effect.

118 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Implementation Chart

YAMAHA Date:10-OCT-2007

Model PSR-E413 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.0

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function...

Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16

Channel Changed x x

Default 3 3

Mode Messages x x

Altered ************** x

Note 0 - 127 0 - 127

Number : True voice ************** 0 - 127

Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=1-127

Note OFF x 9nH,v=0 x

After Key’s x x

Touch Ch’s x x

Pitch Bend o 0-24 semi o 0-24 semi

0,32 o o Bank Select

1,11,84 x *1 o

6,38 o o Data Entry

7,10 o o

Control 64 o o Sustain

71-74 o o Sound Controller

Change 91,93 o o Effect Depth

96-97 x *1 o RPN Inc,Dec

100-101 o o RPN LSB,MSB

MIDI Implementation Chart

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 119

*1 Refer to #2 on page 120.

Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No

Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127

Change : True # **************

System Exclusive o o

: Song Pos. x x

Common : Song Sel. x x

: Tune x x

System : Clock o o

Real Time: Commands o o

Aux :All Sound OFF x o(120,126,127)

:Reset All Cntrls x o(121)

:Local ON/OFF x o(122)

:All Notes OFF x o(123-125)

Mes- :Active Sense o o

sages:Reset x x

120 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Data Format

NOTE:

1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions

as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming

data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. How-

ever, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel

voices, auto accompaniment, and songs.

• MIDI Master Tuning

• System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type

and Chorus Type.

2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be trans-

mitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be trans-

mitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the

Harmony effect.

3 Exclusive

<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H

• This message automatically restores all default settings for

the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning.

<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H

• This message allows the volume of all channels to be

changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive).

• The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values

for “ll” are ignored.)

<MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H,

mm, ll, cc, F7H

• This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of

all channels.

• The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning.

• The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respec-

tively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc”.

<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH,

llH, F7H

• mm : Reverb Type MSB

• ll : Reverb Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Map (page 120) for details.

<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH,

llH, F7H

• mm : Chorus Type MSB

• ll : Chorus Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Map (page 120) for details.

4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is trans-

mitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is

transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH

(accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are rec-

ognized.

5 Local ON/OFF

<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F

<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00

Value for “n” is ignored.

■ Effect map

*When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest

to the speciﬁed value) is automatically set.

* The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display.

● REVERB

● CHORUS

TYPE

MSB

TYPE LSB

00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20

000 No Effect

001 (01)Hall1 (02)Hall2 (03)Hall3

002 Room (04)Room1 (05)Room2

003 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2

004 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2

005...127 No Effect

TYPE

MSB

TYPE LSB

00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20

000...063 No Effect

064 Thru

065 Chorus (02)Chorus2

066 Celeste (01)Chorus1

067 Flanger (03)Flanger1 (04)Flanger2

068...127 No Effect

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 121

ATTENTION

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREE-

MENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE

ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT

IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND

YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”).

BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING

TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT

AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE

USE THIS SOFTWARE.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT

Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s)

and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFT-

WARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data.

The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is pro-

tected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While

you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFT-

WARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copy-

rights.

• You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer.

• You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for

backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup

copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copy-

right notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy

of the SOFTWARE.

• You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFT-

WARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads

and agrees to the terms of this Agreement.

2. RESTRICTIONS

• You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or

otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method

whatsoever.

• You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFT-

WARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE.

• You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to

another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers.

• You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that vio-

lates public policy.

• You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without

permission by Yamaha Corporation.

Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained

by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which

you must observe.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any com-

mercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, trans-

ferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public

without permission of the copyright owner.

• The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be

removed nor may the electronic watermark be modiﬁed without permission

of the copyright owner.

3. TERMINATION

This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFT-

WARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provi-

sions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate

automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termi-

nation, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accom-

panying written documents and all copies thereof.

4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA

As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible

media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in mate-

rials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days

from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire

liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media

if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days

with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media dam-

aged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT

PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY

IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE

You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your

sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS”

and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER

PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DIS-

CLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND

IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR-

RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.

SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING,

YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET

YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE

WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN

THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED.

6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PER-

MIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO

EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PER-

SON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,

EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARIS-

ING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFT-

WARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall

Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action

(whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFT-

WARE.

7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE

Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be

attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data

accompanying the Software, Yamaha identiﬁes any software and data as

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide

by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFT-

WARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is

responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof.

•Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFT-

WARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

•Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

•Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including,

without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages,

expenses, lost proﬁts, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, mis-

use or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

8. GENERAL

This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese

law without reference to principles of conﬂict of laws. Any dispute or proce-

dure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a

court of competent jurisdiction ﬁnds any portion of this Agreement to be unen-

forceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and

effect.

9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT

This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with

respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and

supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, writ-

ten or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or

revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a

fully authorized representative of Yamaha.

122 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT

By installing and/or using this Product you (an individual or legal entity) agree with the Licensor to be bound by the terms of this License which

will govern your use of the Product. If you do not accept these terms, do not install or use this Product.

1. Deﬁnitions

In this License the following words and expressions have the

following meanings:

“License”: this agreement between you and the Licensor and, if

permitted by the context, the conditional license granted to you in this

agreement.

“Licensor”: Avid Technology, Inc., of Avid Technology Park, One

Park West, Tewksbury, MA 01876 USA, through its division Sibelius

Software, of 20-23 City North, Fonthill Road, London N4 3HF, UK

“Product”: the Software and the Documentation.

“Software”: the Sibelius Scorch web browser plug-in, Opus, Helsinki,

Inkpen2 and Reprise font families, any other programs or ﬁles

supplied by the Licensor which are included in or with the Sibelius

Scorch installer, and the Sibelius Scorch installer.

“Documentation”: any documentation in any form relating to the

Software supplied to you with the Software or by the Licensor.

2. License

2.1 The Licensor grants to you a non-exclusive non-transferable

license to use this Software in accordance with the

Documentation on any number of computers. Title to the

Product is not transferred to you. Ownership of the Product

remains vested in the Licensor and its licensors, subject to the

rights granted to you under this License. All other rights are

reserved.

2.2 You may make one printout for your own use of any part of the

Documentation provided in electronic form. You shall not make

or permit any third party to make any further copies of any part

of the Product whether in eye or machine-readable form.

2.3 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to,

(1) translate, enhance, modify, alter or adapt the Product or any

part of it for any purpose (including without limitation for

the purpose of error correction);

(2) create derivative works based on the Product, or cause the

whole or any part of the Product to be combined with or

incorporated into any other program, ﬁle or product, for any

purpose; or

(3) use the Software to create ﬁles in any format (other than

temporary ﬁles created and required by your computer’s

operating system or web browser), including without

limitation screen capture ﬁles, ﬁles generated from the

Software’s playback, graphics ﬁles and print ﬁles, for any

purpose, except for creating MIDI ﬁles (if permitted by the

Software) for private non-commercial use.

2.4 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to,

decompile, decode, disassemble or reverse engineer the

Software in whole or in part for any purpose.

2.5 You shall not, and shall not cause any third party to, translate,

convert, decode or reverse engineer any ﬁle capable of being

read by any copy or version of the Software or any data

transmitted to or from any copy or version of the Software, in

whole or in part for any purpose.

2.6 The Product or any part of it must not be used to infringe any

right of copyright or right of privacy, publicity or personality or

any other right whatsoever of any other person or entity.

3. Copyright

3.1 You acknowledge that copyright in the Product as a whole and

in the components of the Product as between you and the

Licensor belongs to the Licensor or its licensors and is protected

by copyright laws, national and international, and all other

applicable laws.

4. Disclaimer of Liability

4.1 In consideration of the fact that the Product is licensed

hereunder free of charge, (a) the Licensor disclaims any and all

warranties with respect to the Product, whether expressed or

implied, including without limitation any warranties that the

Product is free from defects, will perform in accordance with the

Documentation, is merchantable, or is ﬁt for any particular

purpose, and (b) the Licensor shall not have or incur any

liability to you for any loss, cost, expense or claim (including

without limitation any liability for loss or corruption of data and

loss of proﬁts, revenue or goodwill and any type of special,

indirect or consequential loss) that may arise out of or in

connection with your installation and use of the Product.

5. Termination

5.1 This License shall terminate automatically upon your

destruction of the Product. In addition, the Licensor may elect to

terminate this License in the event of a material breach by you

of any condition of this License or of any of your

representations, warranties, covenants or obligations hereunder.

Upon notiﬁcation of such termination by the Licensor, you will

immediately delete the Software from your computer and

destroy the Documentation.

6. Miscellaneous

6.1 No failure to exercise and no delay in exercising on the part of

the Licensor of any right, power or privilege arising hereunder

shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial

exercise of any right, power or privilege preclude any other or

further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power

or privilege. The rights and remedies of the Licensor in

connection herewith are not exclusive of any rights or remedies

provided by law.

6.2 You may not distribute, loan, lease, sub-license, rent or

otherwise transfer the Product to any third party.

6.3 You agree to the use of your personal data in accordance with

the Licensor’s privacy policy (available from the Licensor or on

www.sibelius.com), which may change from time to time.

6.4 This License is intended by the parties hereto to be a ﬁnal

expression of their agreement with respect to the subject matter

hereof and a complete and exclusive statement of the terms of

such agreement. This License supercedes any and all prior

understandings, whether written or oral, between you and the

Licensor relating to the subject matter hereof.

6.5 (This section only applies if you are resident in the European

Union:) This License shall be construed and governed by the

laws of England, and both parties agree to submit to the

exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts.

6.6 (This section only applies if you are not resident in the European

Union:) This License shall be construed and enforced in

accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of

California. Any suit, action or proceeding arising out of or in

any way related or connected to this License shall be brought

and maintained only in the United States District Court for the

Northern District of California, sitting in the City of San

Francisco. Each party irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of

such federal court over any such suit, action or proceeding. Each

party knowingly, voluntarily and irrevocably waives trial by jury

in any suit, action or proceeding (including any counterclaim),

whether at law or in equity, arising out of or in any way related

or connected to this License or the subject matter hereof.

(License v5.0 (DMN), 30 July 2007)

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 123

Speciﬁcations

Keyboards

• 61 standard-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response.

Display

• LCD display (backlit)

Setup

• STANDBY/ON

• MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX

Panel Controls

• VOICE CONTROL: [SPLIT], [DUAL], [HARMONY], [TOUCH]

• LIVE CONTROL: [ASSIGN]

• STYLE CONTROL: [ACMP ON/OFF], [INTRO/ENDING/rit.],

[MAIN/AUTO FILL], [SYNC STOP], [SYNC START], [START/

STOP]

• SONG CONTROL: [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN), [ ] (A-B

REPEAT), [ ] (REW], [ ] (FF), [ ] (PAUSE), [ ]

(START/STOP)

• REGIST MEMORY: [MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2]

• SONG MEMORY: [REC], [1]-[5], [A]

• LESSON: [START], [L], [R]

• ARPEGGIO: [ON/OFF], [TYPE]

• [DEMO/PC], [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT], [FUNCTION],

[MUSIC DATABASE], [METRONOME], [PORTABLE

GRAND], [SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE],

[VOICE], Dial, CATEGORY[ ]/[ ], [0]-[9], [+]/[-], [TEMPO/

TAP]

Realtime Control

• Pitch Bend Wheel

• Knobs A, B

A: Cutoff, Reverb, Attack, Style Cutoff, Style Tempo

B: Resonance, Chorus, Release, Style Resonance

Voice

• 116 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices

+ 20 arpeggio voices

• Polyphony: 32

• DUAL

• SPLIT

Style

• 165 Preset Styles + External files

• Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP,

SYNC START, START/STOP,

INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL

• Fingering: Multi Finger

• Style Volume

Music Database

• 300 + External files

Education Feature

• Dictionary

• Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn

Registration Memory

•8 banks x 2 types

Function

• VOLUME: Style Volume, Song Volume

• OVERALL: Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensi-

tivity, Pitch Bend Range

• MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,

Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance

• DUAL VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,

Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance

• SPLIT VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,

Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance

• EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type

• HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume

• ARPEGGIO: Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio Velocity

• SFF Load: Style File Load

•

PC: PC Mode

•

MIDI: Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send,

Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out

• METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature

Denominator, Metronome Volume

• LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L)

• UTILITY: Grade, Demo Cancel, Sleep

Effects

• Reverb: 9 types

• Chorus: 4 types

• Harmony: 26 types

• Arpeggio: 100 types

Song

• 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM

Songs (70)

• Song Clear, Track Clear

• Song Volume

• Song Control: REPEAT & LEARN, A-B REPEAT, PAUSE,

REW, FF, START/STOP

Performance assistant technology

Recording

• Song

User Song: 5 Songs

Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE

MIDI

• Local On/Off • Initial Send • External Clock

• Keyboard Out • Style Out • Song Out

Auxiliary jacks

• PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB, SUSTAIN

Ampliﬁer

• 2.5W + 2.5W

Speakers

• 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2

Power Consumption

• 10W

Power Supply

• Adaptor: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by

Yamaha

• Batteries:

Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries

Dimensions (W x D x H)

• 946 x 402 x 136 mm (37-1/4" x 15-13/16" x 5-3/8")

Weight

• 7.0kg (15 lbs. 7 oz.) (not including batteries)

Supplied Accessories

• Music Rest

• Accessory CD-ROM

• Owner’s Manual

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are

for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the

right to change or modify products or specifications at any

time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or

options may not be the same in every locale, please check

with your Yamaha dealer.

Optional Accessories

• AC Power Adaptor: PA-130 or an equivalent

recommended by Yamaha

• Footswitch: FC4/FC5

• Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L

• Headphones: HPE-150

124 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Index

+, - .................................................. 13, 58

....................................................... 57

(REPEAT & LEARN) ............ 12, 48

(A-B REPEAT) ................... 12, 78

(REW) ..................................... 12, 40

(FF) ......................................... 12, 40

(PAUSE) .................................... 12, 40

(START/STOP) ..................... 12, 58

0–9 .................................................. 13, 58

ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 12, 34

ARPEGGIO ON/OFF .................... 12, 14

ARPEGGIO TYPE ......................... 12, 15

ASSIGN ......................................... 12, 18

CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] .......... 13, 58

DC IN 12V ..................................... 10, 13

DEMO/PC ...................................... 12, 40

Dial ................................................. 13, 58

DUAL ............................................. 13, 29

EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 12, 50

FUNCTION .................................... 12, 83

HARMONY ................................... 13, 60

INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 12, 71

KNOB A, B .................................... 12, 18

LESSON L, R ................................. 12, 44

LESSON START ........................... 12, 44

MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 12, 71

MASTER VOLUME ..................... 12, 24

MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 13, 80

METRONOME .............................. 12, 63

MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 13, 49

PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT .... 12, 23

PHONES/OUTPUT ....................... 11, 13

PITCH BEND wheel ...................... 13, 66

PORTABLE GRAND .................... 13, 31

REC, 1–5, A ................................... 12, 52

REGIST MEMORY ....................... 13, 80

SONG ............................................. 13, 39

SONG MEMORY .......................... 12, 52

SPLIT ............................................. 13, 30

STANDBY/ON ...............................11-12

STYLE ........................................... 13, 33

SUSTAIN ....................................... 11, 13

SYNC START ............................... 12, 70

SYNC STOP .................................. 12, 71

TEMPO/TAP .................................. 12, 27

TOUCH .......................................... 13, 65

USB ................................................ 13, 87

VOICE ............................................ 13, 28

A-B Repeat ...........................................78

Accessories .............................................7

ACMP ...................................................34

Arpeggio ...............................................14

Arpeggio List ......................................113

Arpeggio Type ......................................15

Arpeggio Velocity ................................67

Attack ....................................................20

Auto Accompaniment Range ................34

Auto-Accompaniment ..........................34

AWM ......................................................6

Backup ..................................................56

CD-ROM ..............................................93

Channel Message ..................................87

Chord .................................. 36, 38, 75-76

Chord Dictionary ..................................77

CHORD ROOT ....................................77

CHORD TYPE .....................................77

Chorus .............................................19, 62

Chorus Type .................................62, 117

Computer ..............................................87

Cutoff ....................................................19

Default Setting ......................................83

Delete (Song Track) ..............................55

Delete (User Song) ...............................55

Demo ....................................................40

Demo Cancel ........................................85

Display ..................................................59

Drum Kit ...............................................32

Drum Kit List ......................................110

Dual Voice ............................................29

Dual Voice Chorus Level .....................84

Dual Voice Octave ................................84

Dual Voice Pan .....................................84

Dual Voice Reverb Level .....................84

Dual Voice Volume ..............................84

Easy Chords ..........................................38

Easy Song Arranger ..............................50

Effect Map ..........................................120

Effect Type List ..................................117

External Song .......................................42

Filter ......................................................19

Filter (Style) ..........................................20

Flash Memory ...................................... 42

Foot Switch .......................................... 11

Function .......................................... 83-84

Grade .................................................... 45

Harmony ............................................... 60

Harmony Type ..................................... 60

Harmony Volume ................................. 69

Headphones .......................................... 11

Initial Send ..................................... 85, 90

Initialization ......................................... 56

Keyboard Out ....................................... 88

Lesson .................................................. 43

Load SFF .............................................. 74

Local ..................................................... 88

L-Part ................................................... 92

Main Voice ........................................... 28

Main Voice Chorus Level .................... 84

Main Voice Octave .............................. 84

Main Voice Pan .................................... 84

Main Voice Reverb Level .................... 84

Main Voice Volume ............................. 84

Master EQ Type ................................... 69

Measure ................................................ 59

Melody Voice ................................. 51, 79

Metronome ........................................... 63

MIDI ..................................................... 86

MIDI Data Format ............................. 120

MIDI Implementation Chart .............. 118

Music Database .................................... 49

Music Database List ........................... 114

Music Rest .............................................. 7

Mute ..................................................... 79

Notation ................................................ 59

One Touch Setting ............................... 68

Panel controls and terminals Alphabetical order

Index

PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 125

PC Mode ............................................... 89

Performance assistant technology ........ 23

Pitch Bend Range ................................. 84

Power Adaptor ..................................... 10

Preset Song ................................39, 41-42

Recording ............................................. 52

Registration Memory ........................... 80

Release ................................................. 20

Remote control ..................................... 89

Repeat ................................................... 48

Resonance ............................................ 19

Reverb ............................................ 19, 61

Reverb Type ....................................... 117

R-Part ................................................... 92

Save (Backup File) ............................... 92

Save (Panel Setting) ............................. 80

Score ............................................100-105

Sleep ..................................................... 82

SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................... 90

Software Licensing Agreement .......... 121

Song ...................................................... 39

Song Clear ............................................ 55

Song List ...................................... 41, 116

Song Memory ....................................... 52

Song Out ............................................... 88

Song Volume ........................................ 78

Specifications ..................................... 123

Split Point ....................................... 30, 72

Split Voice ............................................ 30

Split Voice Chorus Level ..................... 84

Split Voice Octave ............................... 84

Split Voice Pan ..................................... 84

Split Voice Reverb Level ..................... 84

Split Voice Volume .............................. 84

Standard Chords ................................... 38

Style ...........................................33-37, 70

Style File .............................................. 74

Style List ............................................ 112

Style Out ............................................... 88

Style Tempo ......................................... 20

Style Volume ........................................ 72

Sustain (Footswitch) ............................. 11

Synchro Start ............................ 34, 36, 70

Synchro Stop ........................................ 71

System Message ................................... 87

Tempo .................................................. 27

Time Denominator ............................... 64

Time Numerator ................................... 64

Time Signature ..................................... 63

Touch Response ....................................65

Touch Sensitivity ..................................65

Track ............................................... 52-55

Track Clear ...........................................55

Transfer ........................................... 90-92

Transpose ..............................................66

Troubleshooting (Installation) ..............98

Troubleshooting (Instrument) ...............99

Tuning ...................................................66

USB ......................................................87

USB-MIDI Driver ........................... 96-97

User Song .............................................52

Voice .....................................................28

Voice List ...........................................106

XGlite .....................................................6

126 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual

Limited Warranty

90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS

Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed

below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models

included in the following series of products:

PSR SERIES OF DIGITAL KEYBOARD

If during the ﬁrst 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect

in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor.

If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject

to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the

consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as

warranty replacements.

THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY

IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO

THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR

INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these

limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you speciﬁc legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES

If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:

1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for

assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.

2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation

of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts

under warranty.

3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.

*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the ﬁrst 90 days.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has

a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed.

4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and

to follow all safety precautions.

EXCLUSIONS

This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to

failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of:

1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modiﬁcation or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.

2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an

authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.

3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia,

and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.

Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.

Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________

Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________

(Retailer)

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Electronic Service Division

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue

Buena Park, CA 90620

KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria, CEE Department

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Ofﬁce 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii

Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia

Tel: 495 626 0660

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),

Jingan, Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 080-004-0022

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16

ﬂoor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P. O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

EKB45

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WM17300 XXXPOXXX.X-02B1

Printed in China

Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page

http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Documenttranscriptie

DIGITAL KEYBOARD Owner’s Manual EN SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. NOTICE: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Model ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Purchase Date Serial No. Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) 2 PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard Model Name : PSR-E413 • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. (2 wires) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder. (FCC DoC) Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (battery) (standby) PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor • Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery fluid. • Keep batteries away from children. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. Battery Location • Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. (4)-12 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not dispose of batteries in fire. 4 • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. 1/2 • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Saving data Saving and backing up your data • The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the Registration Memory (page 80.) Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to an external device such as a computer (pages 92). Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. ● Trademarks • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. (4)-12 2/2 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 5 Copyright Notice The following is the title, credits and copyright notices for the song pre-installed in this electronic keyboard: Composition Title: Against All Odds Composer’s Name: Collins 0007403 Copyright Owner’s Name: EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD AND HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD All Rights Reserved, Unauthorized copying, public performance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited. This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. Logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). Stereo Sampled Piano The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling technology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system. Touch Response The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices. It also works in conjunction with the Dynamic Filter, which dynamically adjusts the timbre or tone of a voice according to your playing strength—just a like a real musical instrument! STYLE FILE The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. 6 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-E413 Digital Keyboard! Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument in order to take full advantage of its various features. Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function. Included Accessories The PSR-E413 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • Owner’s Manual • Music rest • Accessory CD-ROM ● Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 7 Special Features of the PSR-E413 ■ Creating New Sounds Page 18 By adjusting just two knobs you can add varying degrees of distortion, “sweetness,” or other characteristics to a sound to change it subtly or drastically. Parameters that can be assigned to the knobs include effect, filter, envelope generator and more. You can create new sounds in real time! ■ Arpeggio Function Page 14 Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this function automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. A variety of arpeggios can be produced by changing your fingering or the arpeggio type. ■ Performance assistant technology Page 23 Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in time with the music. ■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 28 The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety. ■ Play Along with Styles Page 33 Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering a wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance ... and much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new styles to expand your musical horizons. 8 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual PopBossa 102 Contents Copyright Notice .................................................................... 6 Logos ..................................................................................... 6 Included Accessories ............................................................. 7 Special Features of the PSR-E413 ........................................ 8 Setting Up 10 Power Requirements ........................................................... 10 Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)........... 11 Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) .......................... 11 Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) ......................... 11 Turning the Power On.......................................................... 11 Panel Controls and Terminals 12 Front Panel .......................................................................... 12 Rear Panel ........................................................................... 13 Quick Guide Creating Arpeggios 14 Create Original Sounds 18 Assigning Effects to the Knobs ............................................ 18 Using the Knobs................................................................... 21 The Easy Way to Play Piano 23 Play with Both Hands........................................................... 23 Change the Song Tempo..................................................... 27 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 28 Select and Play a Voice—MAIN .......................................... 28 Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL............................ 29 Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands —SPLIT .......................................................................... 30 Play the Grand Piano Voice................................................. 31 Fun Sounds 32 Drum Kits ............................................................................. 32 Sound Effects....................................................................... 32 Playing Styles 33 Select a Style Rhythm.......................................................... 33 Play Along with a Style ........................................................ 34 Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords.................................. 38 Using Songs 39 Select and Listen to a Song ................................................. 39 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause.................... 40 Types of Songs .................................................................... 42 Select a Song For a Lesson 43 Lesson 1—Waiting............................................................... 43 Lesson 2—Your Tempo ....................................................... 46 Lesson 3—Minus One ......................................................... 47 Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn........................ 48 Play Using the Music Database 49 Change a Song’s Style 50 Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger.............. 50 Using the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 50 Record Your Own Performance 52 Recording Procedure ........................................................... 52 Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ...................................... 55 Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song............................................................ 55 Backup and Initialization 56 Backup ................................................................................. 56 Initialization .......................................................................... 56 Basic Operation and Displays 57 Basic Operation ................................................................... 57 Display Items ....................................................................... 59 Reference Adding Effects 60 Harmony............................................................................... 60 Adding Reverb ..................................................................... 61 Adding Chorus ..................................................................... 62 Handy Performance Features 63 The Metronome.................................................................... 63 Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat .......................................... 64 Adjusting the Metronome Volume ........................................ 64 Tap Start .............................................................................. 65 Touch Response Sensitivity................................................. 65 Pitch Bend............................................................................ 66 Pitch Controls....................................................................... 66 Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics....... 67 One Touch Setting ............................................................... 68 Adjusting the Harmony Volume............................................ 69 Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ............................. 69 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 70 Pattern Variation (Sections) ................................................. 70 Adjusting the Style Volume .................................................. 72 Setting the Split Point........................................................... 72 Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) ................................................... 73 Loading Style Files............................................................... 74 Chord Basics........................................................................ 75 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary .................. 77 Song Settings 78 Song Volume........................................................................ 78 A-B Repeat........................................................................... 78 Muting Independent Song Parts........................................... 79 Change the Melody Voice .................................................... 79 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 80 Saving to the Registration Memory ...................................... 80 Recalling a Registration Memory ......................................... 81 Setting the Sleep Mode 82 The Functions 83 Selecting and Setting Functions........................................... 83 Connecting to a Computer 86 What Is MIDI? ...................................................................... 86 Connecting a Personal Computer ........................................ 87 Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer..... 88 Remote Control of MIDI Devices.......................................... 89 Initial Send ........................................................................... 90 Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument... 90 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 93 Important Notices about the CD-ROM ................................. 93 CD-ROM Contents ............................................................... 94 System Requirements.......................................................... 95 Software Installation............................................................. 95 Appendix Troubleshooting................................................................. 99 Scores ............................................................................... 100 Voice List ......................................................................... 106 Drum Kit List .................................................................... 110 Style List ........................................................................... 112 Arpeggio List.................................................................... 113 Music Database List ........................................................ 114 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM ................... 116 Effect Type List ................................................................ 117 MIDI Implementation Chart ............................................. 118 MIDI Data Format ............................................................. 120 Specifications................................................................... 123 Index.................................................................................. 124 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 9 Setting Up Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. ■ Using an AC Power Adaptor Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the instrument is set to STANDBY. WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument. Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack. Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, make sure to replace all batteries, following the precautions listed below. If necessary, also make sure to save all important User data (see page 56), since custom panel settings are lost when the batteries are removed. AC power adaptor AC outlet ■ Using Batteries CAUTION • Use only manganese or alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may exhibit a sudden drop in power when the batteries are low, possibly resulting in a loss of flash memory data. • Be sure to install the batteries in the same direction, maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals. Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time. Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment. • If the instrument will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries to prevent possible fluid leakage. Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. NOTE • Connecting the AC power adaptor automatically supplies power from the adaptor and overrides battery power, even when batteries are installed. 10 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual • Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost. Setting Up Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on. Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) The PSR-E413 speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. WARNING • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB terminal of a computer, and you can transfer performance data and song files between the two (page 87). To use the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the following: • First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use an AB type USB cable to connect the instrument to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the instrument. • Install the USB-MIDI driver on your computer. Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on page 95. CAUTION • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. NOTE • Make sure to purchase a quality USB cable at a musical instrument store, computer store or electrical appliance store. Turning the Power On Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again to turn the power OFF. Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is turned on. CAUTION • Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument. CAUTION • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in data loss. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 11 Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel Song Category List Style Category List (page 41) (page 112) r e i t y u o Display (page 59) GrandPno !0 001 001 !1 !3 q w !2 !4 @6 @5 Front Panel q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 11 w LIVE CONTROL [ASSIGN] button .............................. page 18 [A] and [B] knobs ............................ page 21 e [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 11, 57 r [DEMO/PC] button ........................... page 40 t [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button ............................................... page 23 y [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button ............................................... page 50 u [FUNCTION] button ......................... page 83 i LESSON [L], [R] buttons................................. page 44 [START] button ................................ page 44 o [METRONOME] button .................... page 63 !0 [TEMPO/TAP] button ....................... page 27 !1 SONG MEMORY [REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons............... page 52 12 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual !2 ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] button.............................. page 14 [TYPE] button .................................. page 15 !3 SONG CONTROL [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button ... page 48 [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button ......... page 78 [ ] (REW) button .......................... page 40 [ ] (FF) button .............................. page 40 [ ] (PAUSE) button.......................... page 40 [ ] (START/STOP) button....pages 40, 58 !4 STYLE CONTROL [ACMP ON/OFF] button .................. page 34 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button............ page 71 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button............... page 71 [SYNC STOP] button....................... page 71 [SYNC START] button..................... page 70 [START/STOP] button ..............pages 33, 58 Panel Controls and Terminals Music Database List (page 114) !5 !6 @2 Voice Category List (page 106) !7 !8 @1 !9 @0 @3 @4 Rear Panel @7 r f !5 Dial............................................ pages 58, 83 !6 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons ..................................... pages 58, 83 !7 [SONG] button ................................. page 39 !8 [STYLE] button ................................ page 33 !9 [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............ page 49 @0 [VOICE] button................................. page 28 @1 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] buttons.................... pages 58, 83 @2 [PORTABLE GRAND] button .......... page 31 @3 REGIST MEMORY [MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] buttons .. page 80 @4 VOICE CONTROL [SPLIT] button ................................. page 30 [DUAL] button .................................. page 29 [HARMONY] button ......................... page 60 [TOUCH] button ............................... page 65 @8 @9 #0 @5 PITCH BEND wheel ......................... page 66 @6 Drum Kit........................................... page 32 The illustrations next to each key indicate the drum and percussion instruments assigned to the keys when “Standard Kit 1” is selected. Rear Panel @7 USB terminal ............................pages 11, 87 @8 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 11 @9 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 11 #0 DC IN 12V jack................................. page 10 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 13 e d ck Gui ui Q Creating Arpeggios Quick Guide The arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by simply playing the required notes on the keyboard. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—and the arpeggio function will automatically create a variety of interesting arpeggiotype phrases. By changing the arpeggio type and the notes you play it is possible to create a wide range of patterns and phrases that can be used for music production as well as performance. 1 Press the ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeggio function on. The indicator lights when the Arpeggio function is on. ● Voices and the Arpeggio Function This instrument lets you select a variety of “voices” that you can play via the keyboard. When you select a voice number between 129 and 148 the arpeggio function will automatically be engaged so you can start playing arpeggios immediately. The arpeggio function will automatically be turned off when you select any other voice. If you want to use voices 129–148 for normal performance without the arpeggio function, press the ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeggio function off after selecting the voice. ● Voices for which the arpeggio function is automatically turned on. Voice No. 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 14 Voice Name Concerto Pizzicato Piano Ballad Synth Sequence Guitarist Pauls Bass Trance Bass SynthChords Acid Bass Funky Clavi PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 Voice Name ReggaeOrgan Harpeggio SalsaPIano AnalogSequence Sawtooth Piano Arpeggio Guitar Arpeggio ClubBeat R&B Loop ClubAdds NOTE • See “Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices” on page 28. Creating Arpeggios 2 Select an arpeggio type. The most suitable arpeggio type is automatically selected when you select a voice, but you can easily select any other arpeggio type. ARP Type DownOct 02 The currently selected arpeggio type Press the ARPEGGIO [TYPE] button and the name of the current arpeggio type will appear in the display. Rotate the dial to select the desired arpeggio type. A list of the available arpeggio types is provided on page 113. 3 Play the keyboard. The sound of the arpeggio produced will change according to the number of notes you play and the area of the keyboard you play in. You can save the instrument’s settings at this point and then recall them at any time you want to repeat your performance (page 80). You can also record your performance (page 52). NOTE • Make sure that you are not pressing any of the keyboard’s keys while turning the arpeggio function on or off. The arpeggio function applies only to the main and dual voices, and does not affect split voices. The arpeggio function cannot be used at the same time as the harmony function. 4 When you have finished playing with the arpeggio function, press the ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] button to turn it off. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 15 Creating Arpeggios Create a Pop Tune You can play a style and specify the style chords with your left hand while playing arpeggios with your right hand to create interesting sonic textures and backgrounds. 1 Select the keyboard voice (page 28). For this example we’ll use a grand piano voice, so press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. This convenient voice selection method lets you instantly select a voice with a single button press. 2 After turning the arpeggio function on, select an arpeggio type (steps 1 and 2 on the preceding page). For this example select “02 DownOct”. That completes preparation to use the arpeggio function. 3 Select the style you want to play along with the arpeggio function. A “style” is an automatic accompaniment pattern. Press the [STYLE] button and the name of the currently selected style will appear in the display. Rotate the dial to select the desired style. For this example we’ll use the “002 8BtModrn” (8 Beat Modern) style. 8BtModrn 002 NOTE • Refer to “Playing Styles” on page 33. 16 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Creating Arpeggios 4 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. 8BtModrn 002 The ACMP ON icon will appear. When auto accompaniment is turned on, the left-hand section of the keyboard is used only for specifying accompaniment chords. NOTE • Refer to “When automatic accompaniment is on ...” on page 34. 5 Press the [START/STOP] button. The rhythm accompaniment will start. 6 Begin playing. C Am F G7sus4 Listen carefully to the rhythm of the style, then play the notes shown in the score at the beginning of a measure. The style and arpeggio will begin playing together. The accompaniment will change accordingly each time you play a new left-hand chord. Of course you can also change your right-hand fingering to produce interesting changes. If you’re not comfortable with right-hand playing yet, you could use the performance assistant technology feature described on page 23. When the performance assistant feature is on, playing any right-hand key will always produce musically appropriate notes! Split point Whenever you’re playing a style as well as a right-hand part, be sure that your left hand plays only to the left of the split point and your right hand plays only to the right of the split point. (page 30) PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 17 e d ck Gui ui Q Create Original Sounds The two knobs located in the lower left area of the panel can be used to add variations to the sound being played, transforming the sound in a variety of musical ways. Filter, envelope generator, and other effects can be assigned to the two knobs as required. In this section we’ll explain how effects can be assigned to the knobs, and provide a few tips for their use. Assigning Effects to the Knobs Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequentially select the five effect combinations provided: z → x → c → v → b → z → ... etc. The currently selected combination is shown in the display. GrandPno 001 Number/Effect 001 Knob A Knob B z Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance x Effect Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level c EG Attack Time Release Time v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect– The assignable knob effects are pre-programmed in the pairs listed above. It is not possible to assign different effect combinations. z–c affect the main and dual voices only. Split voices will not be affected. Styles and songs will also not be affected. v–b affect styles only. 18 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Create Original Sounds z Filter Filter effects shape sound by allowing only a specified range of frequencies to pass and/or by producing a resonance peak at the filter’s “cutoff” frequency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of synthesizer-like sounds. * Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass frequencies. Some hints for using the filter effects are provided on page 22. Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance Knob A adjusts the filter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the brightness of the sound. Level Cutoff Frequency Frequency Frequencies in this range are passed. Frequencies in this range are cut off. Knob B adjusts the amount of resonance applied at the filter’s cutoff frequency. Increasing the resonance emphasizes the frequencies at the cutoff frequency, and thus “strengthens” the perceived effect of the filter. Level Resonance Frequency x Effect Reverb reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall or club, while chorus produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect. Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level Knob A adjusts the depth of the reverb effect, and Knob B adjusts the depth of the chorus effect. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 19 Create Original Sounds c EG (Envelope Generator) Envelope Generator effects determine how the level of the sound varies over time. You can make the attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can lengthen or shorten the sustain to most ideally match the music. Attack Time Release Time Knob A adjusts attack time (the amount of time it takes the sound to reach maximum level when a key is played). Knob B adjusts release time (the amount of time it takes for the sound to decay to silence after a key is released). Level Sustain Level ATTACK DECAY Key Played RELEASE Time Key Released v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance In this case the knobs apply the filter effect to the style being played. Knob A and Knob B have the same functions as for “z Filter” described on the preceding page. b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect– Knob A adjusts the tempo of the style and arpeggios. Rotating the knob clockwise increases the tempo while rotating it counterclockwise decreases the tempo. The knob’s center position produces the initial default tempo. 20 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Create Original Sounds Using the Knobs 1 Select the voice you want to play on the keyboard. SquareLd 097 The name of the currently selected voice will appear in the display when you press the [VOICE] button. Use the dial to select the desired voice. For this example we want to use a synth-lead type voice, so select “97 SquareLd” (Square-wave Lead). 2 Press the [ASSIGN] button as many times as necessary to select “z FILTER” (“z” will appear in the display). SquareLd 097 “z” appears here. Knob A can now be used to adjust the filter cutoff frequency, and Knob B can be used to adjust the resonance. 3 Rotate Knob B to its maximum setting (all the way to the right). Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance Rotating the knob to the right while the volume is set to a high level can result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce the volume level. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 21 Create Original Sounds 4 Play with the right hand while operating Knob A with the left hand. Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance If you select a different keyboard voice the knobs will be reset and the ideal settings for the selected voice will be automatically recalled. In the same way, if the “v STYLE FILTER” effect is selected, the knobs will be reset if a different style is selected. If you create an original setting you like, it might be a good idea to save it in the instrument’s Registration Memory (page 80) so you can recall the same settings again at any time. You can also record performances using original sounds you’ve created (page 52). The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects that can be assigned to the knobs. Changing the knob settings does not immediately change the sound. Newly assigned effects will only change the sound when the knobs are first operated after the new effect has been selected. ● Some Ideas for Using the Knobs Number/Effect Try This z FILTER Select a synth-type lead or pad voice (page 106). Turn Knob B all the way up and operate Knob A while playing for some spacey, floating 1980’s effects. x EFFECT Select a voice that sounds as though it already has reverb and chorus effects applied, and turn Knob A and Knob B all the way down to hear the “direct” sound of the voice. You can then turn the Knob A and Knob B settings up to add extra impact and richness to the voice. c EG Select a piano voice, and turn Knob B all the way up and Knob A to about the 3 o’clock position. This should give you a majestic, organ-like sound. The attack time is quite long so play the keys and hold them to let the sound come in fully. Ideal for slow pieces. v STYLE FILTER Select style 39, Euro Trance. Turn accompaniment on and start style playback (page 34). Set Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The overall sound of the style should be a bit muffled, with the drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact. b STYLE TEMPO Play a style and/or arpeggio (page 14) and use Knob A to adjust the tempo. 22 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q The Easy Way to Play Piano This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any notes and still sound good! So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun. It’s never too late to start learning! Refer to page 25 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play. Play with Both Hands 1 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button. The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature is on. Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn the function on or off. 2 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the song number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial or other selection controls to select a different song. For this example try selecting the “010 AveMaria”. Song name AveMaria 010 Song number The song displayed here will be played. ● What is a “Song”? Of course you know the normal meaning of the word, but for this instrument the term “song” also refers to the data that makes up a piece of music. You can listen to the songs, use them for lessons, and use them with a range of other functions (page 39). PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 23 The Easy Way to Play Piano 3 Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button. Adjusts volume. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to four measures while memorizing the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the fifth measure. 4 Play on the keyboard. Before After Play the score on the left along with the accompaniment using both hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. Performance assistant technology will make sure that the notes will come out as if they were played according to the score on the right. Keep playing, and performance assistant technology will continue to “correct” the notes that you play. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [ STOP) button. 24 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual ] (START/ The Easy Way to Play Piano 5 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. The complete score for Ave Maria is provided on page 102. Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro! To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately with your left and right hands (any notes will do). You will get even better results if you match your left-hand rhythm to the rhythm of the chord indicator in the display. Sounds like you’re playing the right notes! How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you play thanks to performance assistant technology! Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of playing produce different results. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 1. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 2. ● Play alternately with the left and right hands—type 3. Play 1 note at a time with your right hand (for example: index finger → middle finger → ring finger). Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a melody with your right ... or any other combination. To use the performance assistant technology feature it is necessary to play a song that includes chord data, or a style with auto accompaniment on. If a song includes the required data, the chords are shown on the right side of the display (page 59). PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 25 The Easy Way to Play Piano Next try playing the Chopin Nocturne. 1 The procedure is that same as that described for playing Ave Maria on pages 23–25. Select “011 Nocturne”. Nocturne 011 2 Listen to eight measures, then begin playing from the ninth measure. Play the keys shown in the illustration. Keep playing F, A and C with your left hand and the correct notes will sound as the song proceeds. When you get used to playing the left hand part, refer to “The Easy Way to Play Piano” on page 23 and try adding the right-hand part. 3 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. The complete score for Nocturne is provided on page 104. 26 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano Change the Song Tempo When using the performance assistant technology or in other situations in which the tempo of the song is too fast or too slow for you, you can change the tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The tempo display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons to set to tempo to anywhere from 011 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute. Tempo 090 Current tempo value You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons. ● About the Beat Display The arrow marks in the beat display flash in time with the rhythm of the song or style. First beat of measure Second beat Third beat Fourth beat PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 27 e d ck Gui ui Q Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide variety of musical sounds. Select and Play a Voice—MAIN This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The voice number and name will be displayed. Voice name GrandPno 001 Appears when the Voice mode is engaged. Voice number Select the voice you want to play. NOTE • You can also select the voice using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons after pressing the [VOICE] button. (page 58) f While watching the displayed voice name rotate the dial. The available voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected here becomes the main voice. For this example select the “092 Flute” voice. r 2 Flute 092 3 Play the keyboard. Try selecting and playing a variety of voices. 28 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Select 092 Flute Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. The second voice is known as the “dual” voice. 1 Press the [DUAL] button. The [DUAL] button turns the dual voice on or off. When turned on the dual voice icon will appear in the display. The currently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. NOTE • The dual voice feature cannot be used during a song lesson (page 43). Flute 092 Dual voice icon Press and hold the [DUAL] button for longer than a second. D.Voice Hold for longer than a second Marimba 110 3 NOTE • You can also select the Dual Voice display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the “D.Voice” item. f “D.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected dual voice will be displayed. r 2 The currently selected dual voice Select the desired dual voice. Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice. For this example try selecting the “109 Vibraphone” voice. Vibes 109 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 29 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 4 Play the keyboard. Two voices will sound at the same time. Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices. Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 72). Split point Split voice 1 Main voice and dual voice Press the [SPLIT] button. The [SPLIT] button turns the split voice on or off. When turned on the split voice icon will appear in the display. The currently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split point. NOTE • The split voice feature cannot be used during a song lesson (page 43). Flute 092 Split voice icon Press and hold the [SPLIT] button for longer than a second. S.Voice Hold for longer than a second FngrBass 042 30 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You can also select the Split Voice display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the “S.Voice” item. f “S.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected split voice will be displayed. r 2 The currently selected SPLIT voice Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 3 Select the desired split voice. Watch the displayed split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example try selecting the “033 Folk Guitar” voice. Folk Gtr 033 4 Play the keyboard. Try selecting and playing a range of split voices. Play the Grand Piano Voice When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected. NOTE • When you press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button all settings other than touch sensitivity are turned off. The dual and split voices will also be turned off, so only the Grand Piano voice will play over the entire keyboard. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 31 Fun Sounds This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet fly-bys, eerie effects, and much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties. Drum Kits Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other normal instrument main voice, for example, all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at different pitches. If you select a drum kit as the main voice, however, each key produces the sound of a different drum or percussion instrument. ◆ Drum Kit Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 28) 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Use the dial to select “117 Std.Kit1”. 3 Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds! Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds! Don’t forget the black keys! You’ll hear a triangle, maracas, bongos, drums ... a comprehensive variety of drum and percussion sounds. For details on the instruments included in the drum kit voices (voice numbers 117 to 128), see the “Drum Kit List” on page 110. Sound Effects The sound effects are included in the drum kit voice group (voice numbers 127 and 128). When either of these voices are selected you will be able to play a range of sound effects on the keyboard. ◆ Sound Effect Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 28) 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Use the dial to select “128 SFX Kit2”. 3 Try out each key and enjoy the sound effects! As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of a submarine, a telephone bell, a creaking door, laughter, and many other useful effects. “127 SFX Kit1” includes lightning, running water, dogs barking, and others. Some keys do not have assigned sound effects, and will therefore produce no sound. For details on the instruments included in the SFX kit voices, see “SFX Kit 1” and “SFX Kit 2” in the “Drum Kit List” on page 110. 32 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Playing Styles This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 165 different styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures (see page 112 for a complete list of the available styles). In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features. Select a Style Rhythm Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played using percussion instruments only. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. The style number and name will appear in the display. Style Name BritRock 001 This icon appears when a style number and name is displayed. Style Number 2 Select a style. Use the dial to select the style you want to use. A list of all the available styles is provided on page 112. PopBossa 102 3 NOTE • An external style file loaded into style number 166 can be selected and used in the same way as the internal styles. The style file must be loaded into style number 166 after transferring it to the instrument from a computer. For details, refer to the section “Loading Style Files” on page 74. Press the [START/STOP] button. The style rhythm will start playing. Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback. NOTE • Style numbers 141, 153–165 have no rhythm part and therefore no rhythm will play if you use them for the above example. For these styles first turn auto accompaniment on as described on page 34, press the [START/STOP] button, and the accompaniment bass and chord parts will begin playing when you play a key to the left of the keyboard split point. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 33 Playing Styles Play Along with a Style You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page. Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style. Turn automatic accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off. PopBossa 102 This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. NOTE ● When automatic accompaniment is on ... The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the “auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the accompaniment chords. • The keyboard split point can be changed as required: refer to page 72. Split point (54 : F#2) Auto accompaniment region 3 Turn sync start on. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on. PopBossa 102 Flashes when sync start is on. When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function off. 34 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles 4 Play a left-hand chord to start the style. You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords. This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try playing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point. The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you play. Try this! Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 36. These examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord progressions sound good with the styles. Split point Auto accompaniment region 5 Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody with your right hand. Split point Auto accompaniment region 6 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback when you’re done. You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment. Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 70. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 35 Playing Styles Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment. In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different fingerings of the same chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge influence on the overall feel of the music you play. On page 34 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take your accompaniments to a new level. On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively creating a complete song. ■Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Play the scores with the left hand. Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 34. * The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simplified scores that indicate which notes to play to produce the chord progressions. Split point Play to the left of the split point. Recommended Style 039 Euro Trance —Dance music with simple chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. F C G Am This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending. 36 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Recommended Style 158 Piano Boogie —3-chord boogie-woogie— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. C F C G F C Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords! Recommended Style 101 Bossa Nova —Bossa nova with jazz-style chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Dm Bm7 5 G7 CM7 FM7 E7 Am A7 This progression includes jazzy “two-five” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 37 Playing Styles Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords: ● Easy Chords ● Standard Chords The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. This function is called Multi Fingering. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 34). The keyboard to the left of the split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in this area of the keyboard. Split point (default: 54/F#2) Db Eb F# G# Bb Db Eb F# C D E F GA B C D E F Accompaniment range Root notes and the corresponding keys ■Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. ■Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using normal fingerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. ● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords] C (9) C C C M7 C M7 (9) C6 C6 (b5) C7 (#11) (9) C M7 C sus4 Cm Cm C (b5) ) ) C M7 ( ( ) • To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. ( Cm ( ( ) ) • To play a major chord Press the root note of the chord. C aug C M7aug C m6 C m7 C mM7 C mM7 ( ) ( • To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). (9) (9) (11) C m7 C m7 (9) (b5) C m7 C mM7 C7 C7 ) (9) C7 ) ) C7 (#9) (b5) C7 ( C 7sus4 C7 ) ) ) ( ( ) (13) C7 ( C sus2 ( ) C 7aug (b13) (b9) ( (#11) C7 C dim7 C dim ( (b5) ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ( ) C m7 ) • To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. * Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. 38 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Using Songs With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs, or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The songs are organized by category. In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly describe the 30 songs provided. Song Listen Lesson Record Select and Listen to a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button. The song number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial to select a different song. Nocturne 011 The currently selected song and number are displayed 2 Select a song. Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 41. Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to. ForElise NOTE • You can also play songs you have recorded yourself (User Songs) or songs that have been transferred to the instrument from a computer in the same way that you play the internal songs. 012 The song displayed here can be played PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 39 Using Songs 3 001–030 Built in Songs (see next page) 031–035 User Songs (Songs you record yourself). 036– Songs transferred from a computer (pages 90–92) Listen to the song. Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to begin playback of the selected song. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [ ] (START/ STOP) button again. Song start! ● Using the [DEMO/PC] button Press the [DEMO/PC] button to play Songs 001–008 in sequence. Playback will continue repeatedly starting again from the first Song (001). You can select a song by using the [-] and [+] buttons after pressing the [DEMO/PC] button. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO/PC] button. Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [ (FF), rewind [ ] (REW) and pause [ ] (PAUSE) playback of the song. ] NOTE • When an A-B repeat range is specified the fast reverse and forward function will only work within that range. REW Press the fast reverse button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the song. 40 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual FF Press the fast forward button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the song. PAUSE Press the pause button to pause playback. Using Songs ● Song List These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s easy song arranger feature, songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Suggested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used. Category Main Demo Voice Demo Function Demo Piano Solo No. 1 Elements 2 CHORD Jessica 3 CHORD Chillin 4 CHORD Grand Piano Demo 5 CHORD Sweet! Tenor Sax Demo 6 CHORD Cool! Rotor Organ Demo 7 CHORD Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo 8 CHORD Modern Harp & Sweet! Soprano Demo 9 CHORD Hallelujah Chorus 10 CHORD Ave Maria 11 CHORD Nocturne op.9-2 12 For Elise 13 Maple Leaf Rag 14 Piano Ensemble Piano Accompaniment CHORD Name CHORD Suggested Uses The songs in this category have been created to give you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument. They’re great for listening, or for use with the performance assistant technology feature. These songs features some of the instrument’s many useful voices. They make maximum use of the characteristics of each voice, and might serve as inspiration for your own compositions. Use these songs to experience some of the instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the performance assistant technology feature. These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as lesson songs. The Last Rose of Summer 15 CHORD Amazing Grace 16 CHORD Die Lorelei 17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. 18 CHORD Scarborough Fair 19 CHORD Old Folks at Home 20 CHORD Ac Ballad (Against All Odds: Collins 0007403) 21 CHORD Ep Ballad 22 CHORD Boogie Woogie 23 CHORD Rock Piano 24 CHORD Salsa 25 CHORD Country Piano 26 CHORD Gospel R&B 27 CHORD Medium Swing 28 CHORD Jazz Waltz 29 CHORD Medium Bossa 30 CHORD SlowRock A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also well suited for use as lesson songs. When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited to play with a band. These songs allow you to practice backing parts one hand at a time, which can be the easiest way to master this important skill. : Includes chord data. The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, 20, and 30 are provided in the Song Book on the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual. Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 41 Using Songs Types of Songs The following three types of songs can be used by the PSR-E413. ● Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument) ................Song numbers 001–030. ● User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035. ● External song files (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–. * The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 91 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument. The chart below shows the basic PSR-E413 processes flow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song files—from storage to playback. Computer Your own performance External song file Record Transfer (page 52) (page 91) External song files can be saved to flash memory (036–). PSR-E413 Song Storage locations Preset Songs (001–030) User Songs (031–035) Flash Memory (036–) The 30 songs built into the instrument. Stored in the internal flash memory. Save to internal flash memory. Currently available. Play 42 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Different flash memory areas are used to store user songs and external song files transferred from a computer. User songs cannot be directly transferred to the external song file flash memory area, and vice versa. e d ck Gui ui Q Select a Song For a Lesson Yamaha Education Suite You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) downloaded from the Internet and saved to flash memory. (pages 90–92) During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle. It’s never too late to start learning! Lesson Flow: Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category! Select the song you want to learn. Select the part you want to work on (right hand, left hand, both hands). Select lesson 1, 2, or 3. The practice methods: ● Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes. ● Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. ● Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song. Lesson start! NOTE • Song numbers 10 and 11 are function demos for performance assistant. The lesson function cannot be used with them. Lesson 1—Waiting In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you play the right note. 1 Select a song for your lesson. Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want to use for your lesson. As listed on page 42 there are a variety of song types. For this example try selecting the “012 ForElise”. ForElise 012 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 43 Select a Song For a Lesson 2 3 Select the part you want to practice. Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a bothhands lesson. The currently selected part is shown in the display. Right Right-hand lesson Left Left-hand lesson BothHand Both-hands lesson Start Lesson 1. Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 …. The currently selected mode is shown in the display. Waiting (Lesson 1) r1 YourTemp (Lesson 2) r2 MinusOne (Lesson 3) r3 ForElise (Song Lesson off) 012 Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1. 44 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Start the lesson! Select a Song For a Lesson Play the note shown in the display. When you play the correct note, the next note you need play is shown. The song will wait until you play the correct note. Waiting r1 Left-hand part In this case “r1” indicate that right-hand lesson 1 has been selected. 007 Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 4 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [ (START/STOP) button. ] Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2. ■See How You’ve Done Excellent Very Good Good OK ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~~~ ~~ When the lesson song has played all the way through your performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation. After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. NOTE • The evaluation feature can be turned off via the FUNCTION Grade item (page 85). PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 45 Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 2—Your Tempo Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 2 on pages 43, 44). 2 Start Lesson 2. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... YourTemp r2 In this case “r2” indicate that righthand lesson 2 has been selected. Start the lesson! Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected. Play the note shown in the display. Try to play the notes at the correct timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original tempo. Left-hand part Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [ (START/STOP) button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3. 46 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual ] Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 3—Minus One Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 2 on pages 43, 44). 2 Start Lesson 3. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... MinusOne r3 In this case “r3” indicate that righthand lesson 3 has been selected. Start the lesson! Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected. Play the note shown in the display. Left-hand part Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [ (START/STOP) button. ] PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 47 Select a Song For a Lesson Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button during a lesson. The song location will move back four measures from the point at which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-measure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you pressed the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button, and then jump back four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all you have to do is press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it right. e Jump back 4 measures and repeat playback q w Song playback direction Press immediately Oops! A mistake! 48 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You can change the number of measures the Repeat and learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] during repeat playback. e d ck Gui ui Q Play Using the Music Database You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. Jude Hey 001 A Music Database name will appear in the display. 2 Select a Music Database. Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 114 of the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For this example select the “158 Patrol”. NOTE • Music Database (MDB) files transferred from a computer can be selected and used in the same way as the internal Music Databases (MDB numbers 301–). File transfer instructions are provided on page 90. Patrol 158 3 Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the split point (page 30). Refer to page 38 for information about playing chords. Split Point Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 49 e d ck Gui ui Q Change a Song’s Style In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by changing the style with which a song is played. You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for a complete change of image. Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger The “Hallelujah Chorus” in the preset songs lets you experience the Easy Song Arranger. Playing it. Press the [SONG] button, then select a “009 Hallelujah Chorus” by using the dial. Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to play it. Halleluj 009 As the song progresses, you will see only the style changes while the song remains the same. Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other songs as well—any songs that include chord data. Using the Easy Song Arranger 1 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The indicator lights when the Easy Song Arranger function is on. You can use the [SONG] and [STYLE] buttons to select a song or style, respectively, while the Easy Song Arranger function is on. 2 50 Select a Song. Press the [SONG] button, then select the song you want to arrange. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Change a Song’s Style 3 Listen to the song. Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to begin playback of the song. Move on to the next step while the song is playing. Song start! 4 Select a style. 5 Select a voice you want to play as a song melody. Press the [STYLE] button and then rotate the dial to hear how the song sounds with different styles. As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only the styles change. When you have selected a suitable style move on to the next step while the song is still playing. Press the [VOICE] button. The currently selected voice number and name will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different voice. NOTE • When playing song numbers 010, 011 and 020 to 030 while using the Easy Song Arranger, melody tracks will be automatically muted and no melody will sound. In order to hear the melody tracks you will need to press the SONG MEMORY buttons [3] to [5]. NOTE • Because the Easy Song Arranger uses song data you can’t specify chords by playing in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/ OFF] button will not function. • If the time signature of the song and style are different, the time signature of the song will be used. GrandPno 001 6 The currently selected voice number and name are displayed here. Change the song’s melody voice. Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. After SONG MELODY VOICE appears on the display the voice you selected in step 5 becomes the song’s melody voice. SONG MEL Hold for longer than a second 7 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button to turn the function off. The indicator will go out. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 51 e d ck Gui ui Q Record Your Own Performance You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as user songs 031 through 035. The recorded song can be played back on the instrument. ■ Recordable Data You can record to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track. Each track can be recorded individually. To record your own performance, first use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the track(s) you want to record on. ● Melody Track [1]–[5].......... Record the melody parts. ● Style Track [A] ................... Records the chord part. Melody NOTE • Up to approximately 10,000 notes can be recorded for the five user songs if you record only to the melody tracks. Up to approximately 5,500 chord changes can be recorded for the five user songs if you record only to the style track. Chords Specify track(s) and record Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track A ■ Track Mute This instrument allows you to choose whether recorded tracks will play back while you are recording or playing back other tracks (page 79). Recording Procedure 1 Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you want to record to. User 1 031 52 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Rotate the dial to select a song number between 031 and 035. Record Your Own Performance 2 Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your selection on the display. CAUTION • If you record to a track that contains previously-recorded data the previous data will be overwritten and lost. ◆ Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track Together Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button. The selected tracks will flash in the display. NOTE • Style accompaniment is automatically turned on when you select the style track [A] for recording. • Style accompaniment cannot turned on or off while recording is in progress. User 1 • If you use a split voice for recording, notes played to the left of the split point will not be recorded. 001 rEC Press and hold ◆ Record a Melody track Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. The selected track will flash in the display. NOTE • If style accompaniment is on and track [A] has not yet been recorded, the style track [A] will automatically be selected for recording when a melody track is selected. If you only want to record a melody track, be sure to turn the style track [A] off. User 1 001 rEC To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a second time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off while recording is in progress. 3 Recording will start when you play on the keyboard. NOTE You can also start recording by pressing the [ ] (START/STOP) button. The current measure will be shown on the display during recording. • If the memory becomes full during recording a warning message will appear and recording will stop automatically. Use the song clear or track clear (page 55) function to delete unwanted data and make more room available for recording, then do the recording again. User 1 rEC 003 Recording starts Current measure 4 Stop recording by pressing the [ [REC] button. ] (START/STOP) or or PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 53 Record Your Own Performance If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording the style track an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will stop. When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will light. ● To Record Other Tracks Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks. By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5], [A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display) while recording new tracks. ● To Re-record a Track Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal way. The new material will overwrite the previous data. 5 When the recording is done ... ◆ To Play Back a User Song User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 39). 1 Press the [SONG] button. 2 The current song number/name will be displayed—use the dial to select the user song (031–035) you want to play. 3 Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to start playback. ● Data Recording Limitations • The split voice cannot be recorded. • The following data are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes made during the song will not be recorded. reverb type, chorus type, time signature, style number, style volume, tempo 54 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Record Your Own Performance Song Clear—Deleting User Songs This function clears an entire user song (all tracks). 1 2 NOTE Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031– 035) you want to clear. • If you only want to clear a specific track from a user song use the Track Clear function. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second Press and hold 3 Press the [+] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the song. YES A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. NOTE • To execute the Song Clear function press the [+] button. Press [-] to cancel the Song Clear operation. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the song is being cleared. Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song. 1 2 Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031– 035) you want to clear. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5], [A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. ClrTr1 YES Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the [+] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the track. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. NOTE • To execute the Track Clear function press the [+] button. Press [-] to cancel the Track Clear operation. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the track is being cleared. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 55 Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below. ● The Backup Parameters • User Songs • Style 166 • Touch Response on/off • Registration Memory • FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Master EQ type, Sleep Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. ■Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user setting, registration memory, user songs, style file 166—turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. ■Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear song, style and music database files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest black keys. 56 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual CAUTION • When you execute the Flash Clear operation, data you have purchased will also be cleared. Be sure to save data you want to keep to a computer. Basic Operation and Displays Basic Operation Overall PSR-E413 control is based on the following simple operations. 1 Press a button to select a basic function. 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. 3 Start a function. 3 Start a function. 2 Select an item or value. 1 Select a basic function. Display (page 59) GrandPno 001 001 ● Volume Adjustment Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones plugged into the PHONES jack. Rotate counterclockwise to lower the volume. 1 Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. The “Press & Hold” Symbol The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a range of functions. Press a button to select a basic function. Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson. Select an auto-accompaniment style. Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 57 Basic Operation and Displays 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be displayed. You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item. ForElise 012 This portion of the display indicates the name and number of the currently selected song, voice and style. It also displays the name and current setting/ value of other functions. f ● CATEGORY [ Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value of the selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial continuously to continuously increase or decrease the value. Increase ] and [ ] buttons When selecting a song, style, or voice, you can use these buttons to jump to the first item in the next or previous category. f Decrease r ● Dial r ■ Changing Values ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons are useful for selecting categorized items, as in the example below. ● [+] and [-] Buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increment the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrement the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increment or decrement the value in the corresponding direction. Jump to the first item in the next or previous category. Example: VOICE SELECT SweetFlt Press briefly to decrement. Press briefly to increment. 090 The first voice in the selected category is selected. ● Number Buttons [0]–[9] Example: Song number “003” can be entered in three ways. • [0] → [0] → [3] • [0] → [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) • [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) 3 Press number buttons [0], [0], [3]. r In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you first use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when you have to select from a large number of voices. f The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number or parameter value. Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below). In most procedures described throughout this owner’s manual the dial is recommended for selection simply because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection method. Please note however, that most items or values that can be selected using the dial can also be selected using the [+] and [-] buttons. Start a function. This is the [START/STOP] button. Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm). 58 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation and Displays Display Items The display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions. Notation Displays the melody and chord notes of a song when the Song Lesson function is in use, or the notes of chords you specify when the Dictionary function is in use. At other times the notes you play on the keyboard are displayed. BEAT number and MEASURE Indicates the beat number in a measure during the Metronome function. Indicates the current measure during playback of a song or style, and the currently set Tempo value for the song or style. (see page 27) 001 Chord Display NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va” in the notation. • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. TOUCH Indicates that Touch response is turned on. (see page 65) HARMONY Indicates that Harmony is turned on. (see page 60) Indicates the name of the chord currently being played back, or the name of the chord being played on the keyboard. Song Track Display Information related to the song tracks is shown here. (see page 52, 79) GrandPno 001 001 DUAL Indicates that the Dual voice is turned on. (see page 29) SPLIT Indicates that the Split voice is turned on. (see page 30) ARPEGGIO Beat Display Indicates the current style or song beat with flashing arrows. (see page 27) Indicates that the Arpeggio is turned on. (see page 14) Knob Assign Display Performance assistant technology Indicates that performance assistant technology is turned on. (see page 23) This display allows you to visually confirm parameters assigned to the knobs. (see page 18) ACMP ON Indicates that Accompaniment is turned on. (see page 34) SYNC STOP Indicates that SYNC STOP is turned on. (see page 71) PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 59 Reference e erenc ef R Adding Effects Harmony This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn Harmony feature on. To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY] button again. When harmony is on the harmony icon will appear in the display. 3 Use the dial to select a harmony type. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 117 for information about the available harmony types. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different-refer to the below section “How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as the Effect Type List for details. When you press the [HARMONY] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main voice is automatically selected. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY] button for longer than a second so that the Harmony Type item appears. “HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected harmony type will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different harmony type. NOTE • The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). HarmType Hold for longer than a second. Trio 02 The currently selected harmony type ● How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo) • Harmony type 01 to 05 Keep holding down the keys. Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 34). • Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo) • Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill) Keep holding down the keys. Hold down two keys. 60 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 69). Adding Effects Adding Reverb Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select a reverb type. You can check how the selected reverb type sounds by playing on the keyboard. StyleVol 100 2 Use the CATEGORY [ Hall3 r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Reverb Type item. “Reverb” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected reverb type will be displayed. 03 Selected reverb type Refer to the Effect Type List on page 117 for information about the available reverb types. ● Adjusting the Reverb Send Level You can individually adjust the amount of reverb that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 84). Reverb Hall2 02 The currently selected reverb type PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 61 Adding Effects Adding Chorus The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison. When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select a chorus type. You can check how the selected chorus type sounds by playing on the keyboard. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Chorus Type item. “Chorus” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected chorus type will be displayed. Chorus2 2 Selected chorus type Refer to the Effect Type List on page 117 for information about the available chorus types. Chorus Chorus1 1 The currently selected chorus type 62 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual ● Adjusting the Chorus Send Level You can individually adjust the amount of chorus that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 84). e erenc ef R Handy Performance Features The Metronome The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Use it to set the tempo that is most comfortable for you. ■Start the metronome ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME] button. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again. ■Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo setting. Tempo GrandPno 001 090 1 Current Tempo setting 2 Use the dial to select a tempo from 11 to 1 280. Indicates the beat number in the measure PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 63 Handy Performance Features Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature. NOTE • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. 3 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the beat length function “TimesigD”. The currently selected beat length will be displayed. f ton for longer than a second to select the number of beats per measure function “TimesigN”. The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5 for this example. r 1 Press and hold the [METRONOME] but- Hold for longer than a second. TimesigN 04 Number of beats per measure. TimesigD 04 2 Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure. A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”. The length of one beat. 4 Use the dial to select the beat length. Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th note). Select 8 for this example. Adjusting the Metronome Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required. f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Metronome Volume item. MtrVol 100 Metronome volume 64 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Tap Start You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected style/ song will begin playing at the tapped tempo. Touch Response Sensitivity When touch response is on you can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps. 1 Press the [TOUCH] button to turn touch response on. The touch response icon will appear in the display when touch response is on (page 59). 3 Use the dial in response to keyboard dynamics to select a touch sensitivity setting between 1 and 3. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics—i.e. greater sensitivity. GrandPno 001 NOTE • The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”. Touch response icon 2 Press and hold the [TOUCH] button for longer than a second so that the Touch Sensitivity item appears. “TouchSns” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected touch sensitivity will be displayed. TouchSns Hold for longer than a second. Medium 2 Touch Sensitivity PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 65 Handy Performance Features Pitch Bend The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a voice such as the “040 Overdriven” guitar voice, you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending effects. Pitch Controls ◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose) The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. ◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning) The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone). 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 2 Use the CATEGORY [ Transpos 00 3 Use the dial to set the transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. 66 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Tuning item. f r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Transpose item. Tuning 000 3 Use the dial to set the tuning value between -100 and +100 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. Handy Performance Features Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select “2 Thru”. When “1 Original” is selected the arpeggio volume is the same regardless of changes in keyboard velocity. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the arpeggio velocity function “ARP Velo”. “ARP Velo” will be shown in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected arpeggio velocity setting will appear. ARP Velo Original 1 The currently selected arpeggio velocity. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 67 Handy Performance Features One Touch Setting Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select voice number “000” to activate this feature. 1 Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2 on page 28). 4 Use the dial to change songs, then play the keyboard and listen to the voice. SweetSpr 000 Use the dial to select voice number 000. 2 Select and play back any song (steps 1 to 3 on page 39). 3 Play the keyboard and remember the sound of the voice. If you have stopped playback at some point during this procedure press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to start playback again. 68 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual You should hear a different keyboard voice than you played in step 3. Press the [VOICE] button after changing songs to see the name of the voice being used. Handy Performance Features Adjusting the Harmony Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to set the harmony volume between 000 and 127. f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Harmony Volume item. HarmVol 080 Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. MasterEQ Speakerl 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the master EQ type function “MasterEQ”. “MasterEQ” will be shown in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected EQ type will appear. 1 The currently selected master EQ type. 3 Use the dial to select the desired Master EQ setting. Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and 2 are best for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speakers. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 69 e erenc ef R Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 33 of the Quick Guide. Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment procedure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more. Pattern Variation (Sections) The PSR-E413 features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. Intro Main A/B Ending Auto fill ● INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. ● MAIN section This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. ● Fill-in section This is automatically added before changing to section A or B. ● ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. 1 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a style. 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn synchro start on. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. Beat arrows will flash when the synchro start standby mode is engaged Appears when Auto Accompaniment is on. 70 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual ● Synchro Start When the synchro start standby mode is engaged, style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START] button again. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. MAIN A ENDING The name of the selected section— MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed. 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A You’re now ready to play the intro. 6 As soon as you play a chord with your This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. ● Synchro Stop When this function is selected the accompaniment style will only play while you are playing chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Style playback will stop when you release the keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC STOP] button. left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords” on page 38. Split point Appears when the synchro-stop function is engaged. Accompaniment range 7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. The style will play while you are playing the keys Style playback will stop when you release the keys FILL A≥B When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section A/B. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 71 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Adjusting the Style Volume 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Style Volume item. f Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. StyleVol 100 3 Use the dial to set the style volume between 000 and 127. Setting the Split Point The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the procedure described below. 3 Use the dial to set the split point to any key from 000 through 127. longer than a second so that the Split point item appears. Split point (54 : F#2) Main voice Split voice Hold for longer than a second SplitPnt • The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson. NOTE • You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the item (page 83). f 054 NOTE • When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point also changes. Split point 72 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual r 1 Press the [STYLE] button. 2 Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] for Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the instrument can be used (page 38). Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function, then press the [ACMP ON/ OFF] button to turn the auto accompaniment on. PopBossa 102 Appears when auto accompaniment is on Accompaniment range PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 73 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Loading Style Files This instrument features 165 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be loaded into style number 166 and used in the same way as the internal styles. In order to use the style file load function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to the instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page 90 (“Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument”). The procedure described below loads a style file that has already been transferred from a computer to the instrument into style number 166. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Execute the load operation. The currently selected function will appear in the display. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the style file load function “Sff Load”. Sff Load After about 2 seconds the name of a loadable style file will appear in the display. If multiple loadable style files have been transferred to the instrument, you can use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in sequence. 74 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual With the name of the style file you want to load shown in the display, press the number [0] button. 4 A confirmation message for the load operation will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to actually load the file. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Chord Basics Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”. The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad, for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale). 3rd 3rd Root In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and anchors the other chord notes. The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third. Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones) The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two additional chords, as shown below. Minor chord Cm Major chord CM Minor 3rd Major 3rd Augmented chord C aug Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Diminished chord C dim Minor 3rd Minor 3rd The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”). ● Reading Chord Names Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord (other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance. Cm Root note Chord type ● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the PSR-E413.) Suspended 4 th 7 th C sus4 Perfect 5 th Perfect 4 th Minor/major 7 th Flatted 7 th Minor chord Major chord Flatted 7 th C M7 Minor chord Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th (b5) (b5) C m7 C7 Flatted 5 th Major 7 th C m7 7 th, flatted 5 th C mM7 Major 7 th Minor 7 th C7 7 th chord Flatted 5 th Minor 7 th chord Major 7 th Major chord 7 th, suspended 4 th C 7sus4 Flatted 7 th Suspended 4 th chord PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 75 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions ■Recognized Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords. Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display Major [M] 1-3-5 C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6 C6(9) * Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 C M7 CM7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 C (9) C(9) C6 (9) (9) CM7 (9) * (#11) CM7(#11) * C M7 C M7 (b5) Cb5 * (b5) Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5 Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 C M7 CM7b5 * Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 C sus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 C aug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 C M7aug CM7aug * Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm(9) Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 C m6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 C m7 Cm7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 C Cm (9) (9) C m7 (11) Cm7(9) 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) C m7 Cm7(11) * Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 (9) (b5) C m7 (b5) CmM7(9) * Cm7b5 CmM7b5 * Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 C mM7 C dim Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 C dim7 Cdim7 Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 C7 C7 (b9) Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7 Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 C7 Cdim C7(b9) (b13) C7(b13) (9) C7(9) (#11) C7(#11) (13) C7(13) (#9) C7(#9) Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7 Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C 7b5 C7b5 * Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C 7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C 7sus4 C7sus4 Suspended second [sus2] 1-2-5 C sus2 C* * These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function. NOTE • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2. 76 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in parentheses are omitted. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the LESSON [START] button for longer than a second. Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard labeled “CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Dict. 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Notation of chord Chord name (root and type) Dict. 001 Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. Dict. 001 NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. 4 Try playing a chord in the auto accom- paniment section of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flash. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 77 e erenc ef R Song Settings Song Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the song volume between 000 and 127. NOTE • Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Song Volume item. SongVol 100 Song volume A-B Repeat You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. A 2 Press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button a second time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). B 1 Play the song (page 39) and press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). 3 The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button. NOTE • The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure increments. • The current measure number is shown in the display during playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button before starting playback of the song. 78 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Song Settings Muting Independent Song Parts Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. You can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. To mute a track, press the appropriate track button (TRACK [1]–[5], [A]) button. Press the same button a second time to disengage track muting. Track number on—Track will playback Track number off—Track is muted or contains no data Change the Melody Voice You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer. NOTE • You cannot change the melody voice of a user song. 1 Select the song and play it. 2 Rotate the dial to select the voice you 3 Press the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, indicating that the voice selected in step #2 has replaced the song’s original melody voice. want to listen to after pressing the [VOICE] button. Strings 050 Hold for longer than a second SONG MEL PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 79 e erenc ef R Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved (8 banks of two setups each). 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Up to 16 presets (eight banks of two each) can be memorized. Saving to the Registration Memory 1 Set the panel controls as required— select a voice, accompaniment style, etc. 2 Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A 4 Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2] button while holding the [MEMORY/ BANK] button to store the current panel settings to the specified registration memory. bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. Writing! Bank 1 Bank number 3 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but- tons to select a bank number from 1 to 8. NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song playback. 80 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual NOTE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. CAUTION • Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registration memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings Recalling a Registration Memory 1 Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. ● Settings That Can be Saved to the Registration Memory • Style settings* Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF, Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo Bank 1 Bank number 2 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select bank you want to recall. • Voice settings Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance, Chorus Send Level), Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level) • Effect settings Reverb Type, Chorus Type • Arpeggio settings Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio ON/OFF • Harmony settings Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume • Other settings Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob Assign * Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song features. 3 Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1] or [2], containing the settings you want to recall. The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears in the display for a few seconds. The panel controls will be instantly set accordingly. REGIST 1 1 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 81 e erenc ef R Setting the Sleep Mode This instrument has a Sleep Mode function that allows it to automatically go into a lowpower “sleep” mode if not operated for specified period of time. In Sleep Mode all panel indicators and the display backlight are off to conserve power. The Sleep Mode function is initially disabled (OFF) by default. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ Sleep oFF Time to Sleep Mode 82 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the SLEEP item. 3 Rotate the dial to set the desired time until Sleep Mode begins (3–20 minutes). The time can be set in one-minute increments. Select OFF to disable Sleep Mode (the instrument will not go to sleep). The instrument will wake from Sleep Mode as soon as a panel control is operated, a key is pressed, or a MIDI command is received. No sound will be produced for approximately two seconds after waking from sleep. e erenc ef R The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tuning, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the function list starting on the opposite page. When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required. Selecting and Setting Functions 1 Find the function you want to set in the list that begins on page 84. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 4 Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the selected function as required. The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/ OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF. In some cases the [+] button will initiate execution of the selected function, and the [-] will cancel the selection. StyleVol 100 3 Select a function. r f Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary until the function’s display name appears in the display. Direct numeric entry. • Decrement value by 1. • OFF • Cancel Transpos • Increment value by 1. • ON • Execute Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. 00 The selected function. Some Function settings are stored in memory as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on page 56 for information on the function settings that are stored on the instrument. To restore all initial factor default settings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure described in the “Initialization” section on page 56. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 83 The Functions ● Function Setting List Setting Style Volume Item title StyleVol Range/Settings Description 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style. Song Volume SongVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song. Transpose Transpos -12–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments. Tuning Tuning -100–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments. Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments. Split Point SplitPnt 000–127 (C-2–G8) Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”— in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. Touch Sensitivity TouchSns 1(Soft), 2(Medium), 3(Hard) When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the feature. Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice. Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice. Main Voice Pan M.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Main Voice Reverb Level M.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Main Voice Chorus Level M.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Main Voice Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 Sets the Main voice attack time. Main Voice Release Time M.Releas 000–127 Sets the Main voice release time. Main Voice Filter Cutoff M.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Main voice filter cutoff frequency. Main Voice Filter Resonance M.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Main voice filter resonance. Dual Voice D.Voice 001–509 Selects the Dual voice. Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice. Dual Voice Octave D.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Dual Voice Pan D.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Dual Voice Reverb Level D.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Dual Voice Chorus Level D.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Dual Voice Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 Sets the Dual voice attack time. Dual Voice Release Time D.Releas 000–127 Sets the Dual voice release time. Dual Voice Filter Cutoff D.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Dual voice filter cutoff frequency. Dual Voice Filter Resonance D.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Dual voice filter resonance. Split Voice S.Voice 001–509 Selects the Split voice. Split Voice Volume S.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice. Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice. Split Voice Pan S.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Split Voice Reverb Level S.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Split Voice Chorus Level S.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. 84 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual The Functions Setting Item title Reverb Type Reverb Chorus Type Master EQ Type Range/Settings Description 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (See the list on page 117) Chorus 01–05 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (See the list on page 117) MasterEQ Speaker1, Speaker2, Headphone, Line Out1, Line Out2 Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 117) Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. Arpeggio Type ARP Type 01–100 Determines the Arpeggio type. (See the list on page 14) ARP Velo 1 (Original), 2 (Thru) Sets the velocity mode for arpeggio playback. Arpeggio Velocity Style File Load Sff Load 001–nnn Loads a Style file. PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 89). Local On/Off Local ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 88) External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 88) Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out SongOut ON/OFF Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Song playback. Initial Send InitSend YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to send, or press [-] to cancel. Time Signature Numerator TimesigN 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Time Signature Denominator TimesigD Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note Sets the length of each metronome beat. Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Lesson Track (R) R-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Lesson Track (L) L-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Grade Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off. Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/PC] button is pressed. Sleep Sleep 3–20, OFF Sets the amount of time before the instrument will go into Sleep Mode. * All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.) PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 85 e erenc ef R Connecting to a Computer Nearly all of the electronic musical instruments made today—particularly synthesizers, sequencers and computer music related devices—use MIDI. MIDI is a worldwide standard that allows these devices to send and receive performance and setting data. Naturally, this instrument lets you save or send your keyboard performance as MIDI data, as well as the songs, styles and panel settings. The potential MIDI holds for your live performances and music creation/production is enormous—simply by connecting this instrument to a computer and transmitting MIDI data. In this section, you’ll learn the basics of MIDI and the specific MIDI functions provided by this instrument. What Is MIDI? No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument”. In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? ● Acoustic guitar note production For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the instrument. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice”, “with which key”, “about how strong”, “when was it pressed”, and “when was it released”. Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampling note. Example of Keyboard Information Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. ● Digital instrument note production L Tone Generator Sampling (Electronic circuit) Sampling Note Note R Playing the keyboard Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production? 86 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Voice number (with what voice) 1 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong) Your keyboard performance and all panel operations of this instrument are processed as MIDI data. The songs, auto accompaniment (styles), and User songs are also made up of MIDI data. MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface and it allows different musical instruments and devices to instantly communicate with each other, via digital data. The MIDI standard is used all over the world and was designed to transmit performance data between electronic musical instruments (or computers). Thanks to MIDI, you can control one instrument from another and transmit performance data between the devices-taking your creative and performance potential to even higher levels. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. Connecting to a Computer ● Channel Messages This instrument is capable of handling 16 MIDI channels simultaneously—meaning it can play up to sixteen different instruments at the same time. Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels. Message Name ● System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device. Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting Instrument Operation/Panel Setting Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus settings, etc. Note ON/OFF Performance data of the keyboard (contains note number and velocity data) Realtime Messages Start/stop operation Program Change Instrument selection (including bank select MSB/LSB, if necessary) Control Change Instrument settings (volume, pan, etc.) Connecting a Personal Computer The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer. ● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 88). ● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 90). The connection procedure is as follows: 1 Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com- puter. The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM. Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on page 93. 2 Connect the USB terminal of the computer to the USB terminal on the instrument using an AB type USB cable (USB cable sold separately). The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft Downloader application that allows you to transfer song files from your computer to the instrument’s flash memory. For instructions about how to install Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song files, see page 91. ■ Precautions when using the USB terminal When connecting the computer to the USB terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. CAUTION • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the USB terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB terminal. • Quit any open application software on the computer. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard or play back a song, etc.) • While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. PSR-E413 USB cable PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 87 Connecting to a Computer Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument. ● When the instrument is connected with computer, it transmits/receives performance data. USB terminal USB terminal PSR-E413 USB cable ■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception. Item Range/Settings Description Local ON/OFF Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. External Clock ON/OFF These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). Keyboard Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback. • If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this may be the most likely cause. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r ] and [ ] buttons to select the item you want to change its value. f CAUTION CAUTION • If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will not start. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select ON or OFF. 88 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Connecting to a Computer ■PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● A number of MIDI settings need to be made when you want to transfer performance data between the computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item can conveniently make multiple settings for you in one operation. Three settings are available: PC1, PC2, and OFF. This setting is not necessary when transferring song or backup files between the computer and the instrument. * Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. PC1 PC2* Local OFF OFF OFF ON External Clock ON OFF OFF Song Out OFF OFF OFF Style Out OFF OFF OFF Keyboard Out OFF ON ON 1 Press and hold the [DEMO/PC] button for longer than a second so that the PC Mode item appears. PC mode oFF 2 Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF. NOTE • When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo, song recording, and lesson features cannot be used. r f NOTE • You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate it (page 83). Remote Control of MIDI Devices You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the panel. ■Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To use the remote control functions, simultaneously hold down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (C1 and C#1) and press the appropriate key (shown below). C#1 C1 C6: Fast forward B5: Start A5: Stop G5: Rewind F5: Top (move to the beginning of the song) E5: Metronome ON/OFF NOTE • Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2 mode. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 89 Connecting to a Computer Initial Send This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup data before the actual performance data. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Initial Send item. Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument Songs, styles, or Music Database files residing on a computer or the supplied CD-ROM, can be transferred to the instrument. Backup files can also be transferred from the instrument to the computer and back. In order to transfer files between your computer and the instrument you will need to install the Musicsoft Downloader application and the USBMIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CDROM Installation Guide on page 93 for installation details. ● Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument. • Data Capacity: 373 KB 256 files total for the Song, Style and Music Database. • Data Format Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1 Style: (.sty) Music Database: (.mfd) Backup File: 08PK61.bup 90 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual ● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)? The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. ■With the Musicsoft Downloader You Can. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Transfer files from the computer to the instrument’s flash memory. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 91. The procedure for transferring songs included on the Accessory CD-ROM from your computer to the instrument is given as an example. Connecting to a Computer ● Backup files can be transferred from the instrument to a computer and back. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 92. q Click the CD-ROM drive Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. ■Use Musicsoft Downloader To Transfer Songs From the Accessory CD-ROM To the Instrument’s flash memory ● ● ● ● ● NOTE • If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding. 1 Install the Musicsoft Downloader and USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then connect the computer and the instrument (page 95). 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the w Double-click “SampleData” Folder → “SongData” Folder, and click a song file. e Click “Open” At this point you can select a Style or Music Database file on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer it to the instrument in the same way as a song file. 6 A copy of the selected MIDI song file will appear in the “List of files stored temporarily” at the top of the window. The memory medium will also be displayed at the bottom of the window to specify the destination for the transfer. Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash memory.” CD-ROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. 3 Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader shortcut icon that is created on the desktop. This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and the main window will appear. NOTE • The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader is running. 4 Click the “Add File” button and the Add File window will appear. 5 Click the button to the right of “Look in” and select the CD-ROM drive from the dropdown menu that appears. Double-click the “SampleData” Folder on the window. Select the file from the “SongData” Folder you want to transfer to the instrument, and click “Open”. q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash Memory” PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 91 Connecting to a Computer 7 After selecting the file in the “List of files stored temporarily”, click the downward [Move] button and a confirmation message will appear. Click [OK] and the song will be transferred from the “List of files stored temporarily” to the instrument’s memory. 8 Close the window to end the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the file transferred from your computer. 9 To playback a song stored in flash memory, press the [SONG] button. Use the dial to select the song you want to play, then press the [ ] (START/ STOP) button to start playback. NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument. • The backup data, including the five User Songs is transmitted/ received as a single file. As a result, all backup data will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. CAUTION CAUTION • Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a copy of all important data stored on your computer. • We recommend that you use a power adaptor rather than batteries when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the batteries fail during the transfer. ● To Use transferred Songs For Lessons... In order to use songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. r f 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song (036–) residing in flash memory for which you want to set the guide track. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the R-Part or L-Part item. 4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer “Backup Files” containing backup data (page 56), including the five User Songs stored on the instrument, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System Drive”, a file named “08PK61.bup” will appear in the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is the backup file. For details about how to transmit backup file using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the application. CAUTION CAUTION • Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the memory media may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. 92 ■Transfer a backup file from the instrument to a computer ● ● ● • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so, it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. e erenc ef R Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide SPECIAL NOTICES • The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation. • Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of this manual before installing the application.) • Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer. • Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software. • This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.). Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer. • Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately. • The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your computer. Important Notices about the CD-ROM ● Data Types This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 95 for software installation instructions. CAUTION • Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on any playback device other than a computer. The resulting high-volume noise may cause hearing damage or damage to the playback device. ● Operating System (OS) The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 93 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide CD-ROM Contents e r Folder Name q w Application / Data Name Contents Musicsoft Downloader This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory. DMN_ Digital Music Notebook Digital Music Notebook is a combination music learning program and online service that makes it easy and fun to practice and master your favorite songs. You can use the convenient and powerful Digital Music Notebook functions with the demo song after installing Digital Music Notebook. DMN_FlashDemo Digital Music Notebook Flash Demo Full motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital Music Notebook. Song Book Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs 1–11, 16, 20 and song 30 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual beginning on page 100. q MSD_ w e SongBook USBdrv2k_ USB-MIDI Driver (Windows 2000/XP) USBdrvVista_ USB-MIDI Driver (Windows Vista/XP x64) r SampleData SongData MIDI 70 songs StyleData 5 style files MDB 5 music database files This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer via USB. These songs, styles, or music database can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the instrument functions. In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer. You can download the Adobe Reader. Please check the following URL: http://www.adobe.com/ ■Using the CD-ROM ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Please read the Software License Agreement on page 121 before opening the CD-ROM package. 1 Check the system requirements to make sure that the software will run on your computer. 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The start window should appear automatically. 3 Install the USB-MIDI driver to the com- puter. Refer to “Installing the USB-MIDI Driver” on page 95 for installation and setup instructions. 94 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 4 Connect the instrument to the com- puter. The connection procedure is described on page 87. 5 Install the software. Musicsoft Downloader: See page 97. 6 Launch the software. For further software operation refer to the online help supplied with the software. Refer to the “Troubleshooting” on page 98 when you have trouble with installing the driver. Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide System Requirements Application/Data Musicsoft Downloader OS CPU Memory Hard Disk Display Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional/ Vista 233 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family (500 MHz or higher is recommended) 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) at least 128 MB of free space (at least 512 MB of free space is recommended) 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit) * Only 32-bit is supported. USB Driver for Windows 2000/XP Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional 166 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family 32 MB or more (64 MB or more is recommended) at least 3 MB of free space — USB Driver for Windows Vista/XP x64 Windows Vista/XP Professional x64 Edition 800 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium® /Celeron® Processor family or Intel® 64 compatible processor 512 MB or more at least 3 MB of free space — 400 MHz or higher processor clock speed (Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family, or compatible processor recommended) 128 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) 1 GHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family (1.4 GHz or more is recommended) 256 MB or more Digital Music Notebook Windows XP Home/ Professional Edition, Service Pack 1a (SP1a) more/Windows Vista * Only 32-bit is supported. Digital Music Notebook (Requirements for playing content with video included.) Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional/ Vista * Only 32-bit is supported. at least 150 MB of free space 1024 x 768 HighColor (16-bit) Software Installation ● Uninstall (Removing the Software) Installed software can be removed from your computer as follows: From the Windows Start menu select Start → Settings → Control panel → Add or Remove Applications → Install and Uninstall. Select the item you want to remove and click [Add or Remove]. Follow the on-screen instructions to remove the selected software. NOTE • The actual names of the menu items and buttons will depend on the OS version you are using. ■ Installing the USB-MIDI Driver● ● ● ● In order to be able to communicate with and use MIDI devices connected to your computer, the appropriate driver software must be properly installed on your computer. The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software and similar applications on your computer to transmit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI devices via a USB cable. Computer Sequence software USB Cable MIDI device Driver • Windows 2000 installation ➔ page 96. • Windows XP installation ➔ page 96. • Windows Vista installation ➔ page 97 Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you will be using (D:, E:, Q: etc.) The drive name is displayed beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My Computer” folder. The root directory of the CDROM drive will be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 95 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide Installing the driver on Windows 2000 Installing the driver on Windows XP 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis- 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis- 2 3 4 5 6 trator” account to log on to Windows 2000. Select [My Computer] ➔ [Control Panel] ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing] ➔ [File Signature Verification], and check the radio button to the left of “Ignore—Install all files, regardless of file signature” and click [OK]. Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system automatically launches the Found New Hardware Wizard. Click [Next]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. Select the radio button for “Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]”, then click [Next]. Check the “CD-ROM drives” check box, deselect all other check boxes, then click [Next]. 2 3 4 5 6 NOTE • If the system prompts you to insert the Windows CD-ROM during detection of the drivers, point to the “USBdrv2k_” folder (e.g., D:\USBdrv2k_) and continue the installation. 7 Deselect the “Install one of the other drivers”, then click [Next]. NOTE • If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature”, click [Yes]. 8 When the installation is complete, the 9 Wizard displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard”. Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) Restart the computer. The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. 7 trator” account to log on to Windows XP. Select [Start] ➔ [Control Panel]. If the control panel appears as “Pick a category”, click “Switch to Classic View” in the upper left of the window. All control panels and icons will be displayed. Go to [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing Options] and check the radio button to the left of “Ignore” and click [OK]. Click the [OK] button to close System Properties, and then click “X” in the upper right of the window to close the Control Panel. Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system launches the Found New Hardware Wizard automatically. Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right corner, wait until Wizard window is displayed. (Some computers may take a while to display the window.) If the Wizard window prompts you to specify whether or not to connect to Windows Update, select the radio button for “No, not this time”, then click [Next]. Select the radio button for “Install the software automatically (recommended)”, then click [Next]. NOTE • If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP”, click [Continue Anyway]. 8 When the installation is complete, the Wizard displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard”. Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) 9 Restart the computer. If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right corner, wait until the Wizard window is displayed. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. 96 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide NOTE • This Wizard window will not appear when using Windows XP Professional x64 Edition. There is no need to restart the computer. 10 When using Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, the Support Module must be installed. After installing the USB-MIDI drivers for all the connected USB devices, select “My Computer” from the Start menu. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Select “USBdrvVista_” → “XPx64SupportModule” → “Setup.exe” and launch “Setup.exe.” Follow the onscreen directions. (Some computers may take a while to display the window.) The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. ■Installing the Musicsoft Downloader and Digital Music Notebook Applications ● ● ● IMPORTANT • You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows 2000, XP or Vista. • You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Digital Music Notebook on a computer running Windows XP or Vista. NOTE • Once the Support Module is installed, this step is not necessary, even if you’ve connected a new USB device or updated the USBMIDI driver. Installing the driver in Windows Vista 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis2 3 trator” account to log on to Windows Vista. Insert the included CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system automatically launches the “Found New Hardware” window. Click “Locate and install driver software (recommended)”. Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. (Some computers may take a while to display the window.). NOTE • If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue]. 4 If a message allowing Windows to search 5 online for driver software appears, click “Don’t search online.” If a message prompting you to insert the disk that came with your device appears, click [Next]. The system starts the installation. NOTE • If the “Windows Security” window appears, confirm this software is authored by Yamaha Corporation then click [Install]. 6 When the installation is complete, the system displays the message “The software for this device has been successfully installed.” Click [Close]. IMPORTANT • When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that Internet Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your computer. IMPORTANT • Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music Notebook content. Credit card processing may not be possible for some areas, so please check with your local authorities to make sure that your credit card can be used. NOTE • Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBELIUSSCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully agrees to when using the application. Please read carefully the AGREEMENT at the end of this manual before using the application. 1 Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start window will appear automatically showing software applications. NOTE • If the start window does not appear automatically, double click your “My Computer” folder to open it. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Double click “Start.exe” and proceed to step 2, below. 2 Click [Musicsoft Downloader] or [Digital Music Notebook]. 3 Click the [install] button, and follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. For Digital Music Notebook operating instructions see the help menu: launch the Digital Music Notebook application and click “Help”. For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and click “Help”. * You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft Downloader at the following Internet URL. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ IMPORTANT • Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files between this instrument and a computer. No other file transfer application can be used. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 97 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide ■Troubleshooting The driver cannot be installed. • Is the USB cable connected correctly? Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the USB cable, then connect it again. • Is the USB function enabled on your computer? When you connect the instrument to the computer for the first time, if the “Add New Hardware Wizard” does not appear, the USB function on the computer may be disabled. Perform the following steps. 1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear at “Universal serial bus controller” or “USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x” mark, the USB controller is disabled. • Is any unknown device registered? If driver installation fails, the instrument will be marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will not be able to install the driver. Delete the “Unknown device” by following the steps below. 1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 3 4 5 Look for “Other devices” in the menu “View devices by type”. If you find “Other devices”, double-click it to extend the tree to look for “Unknown device”. If one appears, select it and click the [Remove] button. Remove the USB cable from the instrument, and make the connection again. Install the driver again. • Windows 2000 users........ see page 96 • Windows XP users........... see page 96 • Windows Vista users ....... see page 97 When controlling the instrument from your computer via USB, the instrument does not operate correctly or no sound is heard. • Did you install the driver? (page 95) • Is the USB cable connected correctly? • Are the volume settings of the instrument, playback device, and application program set to the appropriate levels? • Have you selected an appropriate port in the sequence software? 98 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual • Are you using the latest USB-MIDI driver? The latest driver can be downloaded from the following web site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ Playback response is delayed. • Does your computer satisfy the system requirements? • Is any other application or device driver running? Cannot suspend or resume the computer correctly. • Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI application is running. You may not be able to suspend/resume normally, depending on the particular environment (USB Host Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and connecting the USB cable will allow you to use the instrument functions again. How can I remove the driver? [Windows 2000/XP/Vista] 1 2 3 4 5 Start the computer and use the “Administrator” account to log on Windows. Close all applications and windows that are open. Insert the included CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. Select “My Computer” from the Start menu. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Select “USBdrvVista_” or “USBdrv2k_” folder ➔ “uninstall” folder ➔ “uninstall.exe” file and launch “uninstall.exe.” file. Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the driver. NOTE • When using a 64-bit OS, click “uninstall_x64.exe.” from “USBdrvVista_” folder. NOTE • If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue]. 6 A message asking you to restart your computer in order to complete the uninstall procedure will appear. Driver removal will be complete when you have restarted your computer. Appendix Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 88.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. • • • • When using the Dictionary function (page 77), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The volume is too soft. The sound quality is poor. The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new ones, or use the optional AC adaptor. The style or song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock” on page 88. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 84) is set to an appropriate level. The style does not sound properly. Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 72). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/ STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number 141 or a style between 153 and 165 (Pianist). This is not a malfunction. Style number 141 and style numbers 153–165 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song. Some notes don’t sound when playing multiple notes simultaneously on the keyboard, or some notes don’t sound when playing arpeggios. You have exceeded 32 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyphony (the maximum number of notes that can be played simultaneously) of the instrument. The instrument will play normally as long as no more than 32 notes are being played at once, both on the keyboard and by any automatic playback functions. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played. Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on. Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off. The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any style-related function. There is no harmony sound. The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types 01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range. Types 06–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 06 = 12 you need to play two notes at the same time. No sound is produced for about two seconds after the instrument wakes from sleep mode. This is normal. The speakers are muted for about two seconds, until the instrument wakes fully from the sleep mode. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 99 Scores This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece. Song No. 9 q =123 (Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger) Hallelujah Chorus 100 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Scores PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 101 Scores This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 10 q =61 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Ave Maria P.A.T. Type =CHORD Your Turn. Repeatedly Play the Same Key. 102 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Scores PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 103 Scores This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 11 q =108 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Nocturne op.9-2 P.A.T. Type =CHORD You Can Even Play the Same Keys! 104 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Scores PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 105 Voice List ■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program change numbers are often specified as numbers “0–127.” Since this list uses a “1–128” numbering system, in such cases it is necessary to subtract 1 from the transmitted program change numbers to select the appropriate sound: e.g. to select No. 2 in the list, transmit program change number 1. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. ● Panel Voice List Voice No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 106 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 0 112 1 Grand Piano 0 112 2 Bright Piano 0 112 7 Harpsichord 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano 0 113 3 CP 80 E.PIANO 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 0 113 6 Hyper Tines 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano 0 112 8 Clavi ORGAN 0 118 19 Cool! Organ 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2 0 112 19 Rock Organ 0 114 19 Purple Organ 0 112 18 Click Organ 0 116 17 Bright Organ 0 127 19 Theater Organ 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ 0 113 20 Chapel Organ 0 112 20 Church Organ 0 112 21 Reed Organ ACCORDION 0 112 22 Musette Accordion 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion 0 113 24 Bandoneon 0 113 23 Modern Harp 0 112 23 Harmonica GUITAR 0 112 25 Classical Guitar 0 112 26 Folk Guitar 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar 0 117 28 60’s Clean Guitar 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar 0 112 28 Clean Guitar 0 113 27 Octave Guitar 0 112 29 Muted Guitar 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar BASS 0 112 34 Finger Bass 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass 0 112 35 Pick Bass 0 112 36 Fretless Bass 0 112 37 Slap Bass 0 112 39 Synth Bass 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass 0 113 40 Dance Bass PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) STRINGS 0 112 49 String Ensemble 0 112 50 Chamber Strings 0 113 50 Slow Strings 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings 0 112 51 Synth Strings 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 112 41 Violin 0 112 43 Cello 0 112 44 Contrabass 0 112 47 Harp 0 112 106 Banjo 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 0 112 53 Choir 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble 0 112 55 Air Choir 0 112 54 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 0 117 67 Sweet! Tenor Sax 0 113 65 Sweet! Soprano Sax 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 0 112 66 Alto Sax 0 112 65 Soprano Sax 0 112 68 Baritone Sax 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 112 72 Clarinet 0 112 69 Oboe 0 112 70 English Horn 0 112 71 Bassoon TRUMPET 0 115 57 Sweet! Trumpet 0 112 57 Trumpet 0 112 58 Trombone 0 113 58 Trombone Section 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet 0 112 61 French Horn 0 112 59 Tuba BRASS 0 112 62 Brass Section 0 113 62 Big Band Brass 0 113 63 80’s Brass 0 119 62 Mellow Horns 0 114 63 Techno Brass 0 112 63 Synth Brass FLUTE 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute 0 113 76 Sweet! Pan Flute 0 112 74 Flute 0 112 73 Piccolo 0 112 76 Pan Flute 0 112 75 Recorder 0 112 80 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 0 112 81 Square Lead 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead Voice List Voice No. 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 115 82 Analogon 0 119 82 Fargo 0 112 99 Star Dust 0 112 86 Voice Lead 0 112 101 Brightness SYNTH PAD 0 112 92 Xenon Pad 0 112 95 Equinox 0 112 89 Fantasia 0 113 90 Dark Moon 0 113 101 Bell Pad PERCUSSION 0 112 12 Vibraphone 0 112 13 Marimba 0 112 14 Xylophone 0 112 115 Steel Drums 0 112 9 Celesta 0 112 11 Music Box 0 112 15 Tubular Bells 0 112 48 Timpani DRUM KITS 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 127 0 9 Room Kit 127 0 17 Rock Kit 127 0 25 Electronic Kit 127 0 26 Analog Kit 127 0 113 Dance Kit 127 0 33 Jazz Kit 127 0 41 Brush Kit 127 0 49 Symphony Kit 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2 ARPEGGIO 0 112 49 Concerto 0 112 46 Pizzicato 0 112 1 Piano Ballad 0 96 82 Synth Sequence 0 117 28 Guitarist 0 112 37 Pauls Bass 0 113 39 Trance Bass 0 6 82 SynthChords 0 113 39 Acid Bass 0 112 8 Funky Clavi 0 112 18 ReggaeOrgan 0 112 47 Harpeggio 0 112 2 SalsaPIano 0 115 82 AnalogSequence 0 6 82 Sawtooth 0 112 1 Piano Arpeggio 0 112 25 Guitar Arpeggio 127 0 113 ClubBeat 127 0 1 R&B Loop 127 0 113 ClubAdds ● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List Voice No. 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 0 0 1 Grand Piano 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP 0 40 1 Piano Strings 0 41 1 Dream 0 0 2 Bright Piano 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP 0 32 3 Detuned CP80 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1 Voice No. 161 162 163 164 *165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano 0 0 7 Harpsichord 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2 0 0 8 Clavi 0 1 8 Clavi KSP CHROMATIC 0 0 9 Celesta 0 0 10 Glockenspiel 0 0 11 Music Box 0 64 11 Orgel 0 0 12 Vibraphone 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP 0 0 13 Marimba 0 1 13 Marimba KSP 0 64 13 Sine Marimba 0 97 13 Balimba 0 98 13 Log Drums 0 0 14 Xylophone 0 0 15 Tubular Bells 0 96 15 Church Bells 0 97 15 Carillon 0 0 16 Dulcimer 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2 0 96 16 Cimbalom 0 97 16 Santur ORGAN 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ 0 33 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 1 0 34 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 2 0 35 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 1 0 37 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 3 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 0 64 17 Organ Bass 0 65 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 2 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 0 24 18 70’s Percussive Organ 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ 0 33 18 Light Organ 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2 0 0 19 Rock Organ 0 64 19 Rotary Organ 0 65 19 Slow Rotary 0 66 19 Fast Rotary 0 0 20 Church Organ 0 32 20 Church Organ 3 0 35 20 Church Organ 2 0 40 20 Notre Dame 0 64 20 Organ Flute 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute 0 0 21 Reed Organ 0 40 21 Puff Organ 0 0 22 Accordion 0 0 23 Harmonica 0 32 23 Harmonica 2 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2 GUITAR 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 0 96 25 Ukulele 0 0 26 Steel Guitar 0 35 26 12-string Guitar 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 0 96 26 Mandolin PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 107 Voice List Voice No. 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 *274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 108 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar 0 32 27 Jazz Amp 0 0 28 Clean Guitar 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar 0 0 29 Muted Guitar 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar 0 45 29 Jazz Man 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2 BASS 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 0 0 34 Finger Bass 0 18 34 Finger Dark 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2 0 65 34 Modulated Bass 0 0 35 Pick Bass 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass 0 41 40 DX Bass STRINGS 0 0 41 Violin 0 8 41 Slow Violin 0 0 42 Viola 0 0 43 Cello 0 0 44 Contrabass 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings 0 40 45 Suspense Strings 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp 0 40 47 Yang Chin 0 0 48 Timpani ENSEMBLE 0 0 49 Strings 1 0 3 49 Stereo Strings 0 8 49 Slow Strings 0 35 49 60’s Strings 0 40 49 Orchestra 0 41 49 Orchestra 2 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra 0 45 49 Velocity Strings 0 0 50 Strings 2 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings 0 8 50 Legato Strings 0 40 50 Warm Strings 0 41 50 Kingdom 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2 0 0 53 Choir Aahs 0 3 53 Stereo Choir 0 32 53 Mellow Choir 0 40 53 Choir Strings 0 0 54 Voice Oohs 0 0 55 Synth Voice 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2 0 41 55 Choral 0 64 55 Analog Voice 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2 0 64 56 Impact BRASS 0 0 57 Trumpet 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet 0 0 58 Trombone 0 18 58 Trombone 2 0 0 59 Tuba 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet 0 0 61 French Horn 0 6 61 French Horn Solo 0 32 61 French Horn 2 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra 0 0 62 Brass Section 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2 0 18 64 Soft Brass 0 41 64 Choir Brass REED 0 0 65 Soprano Sax 0 0 66 Alto Sax 0 40 66 Sax Section 0 0 67 Tenor Sax 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 0 68 Baritone Sax 0 0 69 Oboe 0 0 70 English Horn 0 0 71 Bassoon 0 0 72 Clarinet PIPE 0 0 73 Piccolo 0 0 74 Flute 0 0 75 Recorder 0 0 76 Pan Flute 0 0 77 Blown Bottle 0 0 78 Shakuhachi 0 0 79 Whistle 0 0 80 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 0 0 81 Square Lead 0 6 81 Square Lead 2 0 8 81 LM Square 0 18 81 Hollow 0 19 81 Shroud 0 64 81 Mellow 0 65 81 Solo Sine 0 66 81 Sine Lead 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth 0 20 82 Big Lead 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog 0 0 83 Calliope Lead 0 65 83 Pure Lead 0 0 84 Chiff Lead 0 0 85 Charang Lead 0 64 85 Distorted Lead 0 0 86 Voice Lead Voice List Voice No. 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 87 Fifths Lead 0 35 87 Big Five 0 0 88 Bass & Lead 0 16 88 Big & Low 0 64 88 Fat & Perky 0 65 88 Soft Whirl SYNTH PAD 0 0 89 New Age Pad 0 64 89 Fantasy 0 0 90 Warm Pad 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad 0 0 92 Choir Pad 0 66 92 Itopia 0 0 93 Bowed Pad 0 0 94 Metallic Pad 0 0 95 Halo Pad 0 0 96 Sweep Pad SYNTH EFFECTS 0 0 97 Rain 0 65 97 African Wind 0 66 97 Carib 0 0 98 Sound Track 0 27 98 Prologue 0 0 99 Crystal 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp 0 14 99 Popcorn 0 18 99 Tiny Bells 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes 0 41 99 Clear Bells 0 42 99 Chorus Bells 0 65 99 Soft Crystal 0 70 99 Air Bells 0 71 99 Bell Harp 0 72 99 Gamelimba 0 0 100 Atmosphere 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere 0 19 100 Hollow Release 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano 0 64 100 Nylon Harp 0 65 100 Harp Vox 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad 0 0 101 Brightness 0 0 102 Goblins 0 64 102 Goblins Synth 0 65 102 Creeper 0 67 102 Ritual 0 68 102 To Heaven 0 70 102 Night 0 71 102 Glisten 0 96 102 Bell Choir 0 0 103 Echoes 0 0 104 Sci-Fi WORLD 0 0 105 Sitar 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar 0 35 105 Sitar 2 0 97 105 Tamboura 0 0 106 Banjo 0 28 106 Muted Banjo 0 96 106 Rabab 0 97 106 Gopichant 0 98 106 Oud 0 0 107 Shamisen 0 0 108 Koto 0 96 108 Taisho-kin 0 97 108 Kanoon 0 0 109 Kalimba 0 0 110 Bagpipe 0 0 111 Fiddle 0 0 112 Shanai PERCUSSIVE 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell Voice No. 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 96 113 Bonang 0 97 113 Altair 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal 0 0 114 Agogo 0 0 115 Steel Drums 0 97 115 Glass Percussion 0 98 115 Thai Bells 0 0 116 Woodblock 0 96 116 Castanets 0 0 117 Taiko Drum 0 96 117 Gran Cassa 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2 0 65 118 Real Tom 0 66 118 Rock Tom 0 0 119 Synth Drum 0 64 119 Analog Tom 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal SOUND EFFECTS 0 0 121 Fret Noise 0 0 122 Breath Noise 0 0 123 Seashore 0 0 124 Bird Tweet 0 0 125 Telephone Ring 0 0 126 Helicopter 0 0 127 Applause 0 0 128 Gunshot 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2 64 0 4 String Slap 64 0 17 Flute Key Click 64 0 33 Shower 64 0 34 Thunder 64 0 35 Wind 64 0 36 Stream 64 0 37 Bubble 64 0 38 Feed 64 0 49 Dog 64 0 50 Horse 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2 64 0 56 Maou 64 0 65 Phone Call 64 0 66 Door Squeak 64 0 67 Door Slam 64 0 68 Scratch Cut 64 0 69 Scratch Split 64 0 70 Wind Chime 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal 64 0 83 Car Passing 64 0 84 Car Crash 64 0 85 Siren 64 0 86 Train 64 0 87 Jet Plane 64 0 88 Starship 64 0 89 Burst 64 0 90 Roller Coaster 64 0 91 Submarine 64 0 97 Laugh 64 0 98 Scream 64 0 99 Punch 64 0 100 Heartbeat 64 0 101 Footsteps 64 0 113 Machine Gun 64 0 114 Laser Gun 64 0 115 Explosion 64 0 116 Firework The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 109 Drum Kit List • “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “117: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 110 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 2 2 117 127/000/001 118 127/000/002 119 127/000/009 120 127/000/017 121 127/000/025 122 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Snare Roll 2 Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy Open Rim Shot H Short Kick Tight Short Kick Short Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Snare Snappy Electro Snare Noisy 4 Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2 Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog Short Kick Analog Side Stick Analog Snare Analog Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Tom Room 1 Snare Rock Rim Tom Rock 1 Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 Drum Kit List Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 117 127/000/001 123 127/000/113 124 127/000/033 125 127/000/041 126 127/000/049 127 126/000/001 128 126/000/002 Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Analog Snare Clap Snare Dry Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog3 Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog 2 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Kick Soft 2 Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Kick Jazz Kick Small Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Jazz M Tom Jazz 1 Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5 Hand Cymbal Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6 Hand Cymbal Short Tom Jazz 6 Cutting Noise Phone Call Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Door Slam String Slap Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Hand Cymbal 2 Train Jet Plane Hand Cymbal 2 Short Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 Maou PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 111 Style List Style No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 112 Style Name 8BEAT BritRock 8BtModrn Cool 8Bt 60sGtPop 8BtAdria 60s8Beat BblgumPp BritPpSw 8Beat Off Beat 60s Rock HardRock RockShfl 8Bt Rock 16BEAT 16Beat PopShf 1 PopShf 2 Gtr Pop 16Bt Up KoolShfl JazzRock HH Light BALLAD PianoBld LoveSong 68Modern 68SlowRk 68OrcBld OrganBld Pop Bld 16Bld 1 16Bld 2 DANCE ClubBeat Electron FunkyHse ChartR&B MellowHH SoulR&B Chillout EuTrance Ibiza DreamDnc NewHipHp Pop R&B TrancPop ChartPop HouseMsk Swing H TcnPolis Clubdanc Club Ltn Garage 1 Garage 2 TcnParty UK Pop HHGroove Hip Shfl HipHopPp PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Style No. 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 Style Name DISCO ModDisco 70sDsc 1 70sDsc 2 LatinDsc DscPhily SatNight DscChoco DscHands SWING&JAZZ BB Fast BBMedium BBBallad BB Shfl AcidJazz JazzClub Swing 1 Swing 2 OrchSwng FiveFour Jazz Bld Dixie Ragtime AfroCubn Charlstn R&B Soul DetPop 1 60s R&R 6/8 Soul ModrnR&B CroTwist Rck&Roll DetPop 2 Boogie 1 Boogie 2 6/8Blues COUNTRY Cntry8Bt CntryPop CntrySwg CntryBld Cntry2/4 CowboyBg CntryShf Blgrass LATIN BrzSamba Bossa PopBossa Tijuana DscLatin Mambo Salsa Beguine GtrRumba Flamenco RmbIslnd Reggae Style No. 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 Style Name BALLROOM VienWltz EngWaltz Slowfox Foxtrot Quickstp Tango Pasodobl Samba ChaCha Rumba Jive TRAD & WORLD USMarch 6/8March GerMarch PolkaPop OberPlka Trntella Showtune Xmas Swg XmasWltz Reel Hawaiian Indi Pop Bhangra Garba Goa Pop Bhajan WALTZ ItalyWlz MriacWlz Serenade SwingWlz Jz Wlz 1 Jz Wlz 2 CntryWlz OberWltz Musette CHILDREN Learn2/4 Learn4/4 Learn6/8 Fun 3/4 Fun 4/4 PIANIST Stride PnoBls 1 PnoBls 2 Pno Rag Pno R&R PnoBoogi PnoJzWlz PnoJzBld Arpeggio Musical SlowRock 8Pno Bld PnoSwing Arpeggio List Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name 1 2 UpOct DownOct 3 4 UpDnOct SynArp1 5 6 SynArp2 SynArp3 7 8 SynArp4 SyncEcho 9 10 PulsLine StepLine 11 12 Random Down&Up 13 14 SuperArp AcidLine 15 16 TekEcho VelGruv 17 18 Trance1 Trance2 19 20 21 22 23 SynChrd1 SynChrd2 Hybrid1 Hybrid2 Hybrid3 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Hybrid4 PfArp1 PfArp2 PfArp3 PnClub1 PnClub2 PfBallad PfChd8th EPArp PfShfl PfRock Clavi1 Clavi2 ChordUp ChdDance Salsa1 Salsa2 Reggae1 Reggae2 Reggae3 6/8R&B Gospel BlldEP Strum1 Strum2 Pickin GuitChd1 Arpeggio No. 51 Arpeggio Name GuitChd2 52 53 GuitChd3 GuitArp 54 55 FngrPck1 FngrPck2 56 57 CleanGt Slowfl 58 59 Samba1 Samba2 60 61 Harp1 Harp2 62 63 FngrBass CooFunk 64 65 SlapBass AcidBas1 66 67 AcidBas2 FunkyBs 68 69 ComboJaz TranceBs 70 71 72 73 74 LatinBs PercArp Strings1 Strings2 Strings3 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 StrngDwn StrngUp Orchestr Pizz1 Pizz2 Perc1 Perc2 R&B Funk1 Funk2 HipHop Trance Dream 2 Step Ibiza1 ClubHs1 ClubHs2 EuroTek House Ibiza2 Ibiza3 Garage African Tamb Latin Arabic PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 113 Music Database List MDB No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 114 MDB Name ALL TIME HITS Jude Hey New UK MyLoving All OK Buttercp JustCall CheepChp Daddy’s Dance? GetBack GtrWheel HighTide IWasBorn Sailing BluJeans Holiday Imagine LoveMe LetItBld LdyMdona YelowSub Marriage MovinOut My Shell NowNever DoLoveMe TcktRide SeeClear Masachus Hard Day USA Pie Norway YesterBd MODERN POP Watches SoundMPH Hold Us Unfound NeedSome PrtTmLvr MoonShdw NikitSng Sure of Off Day Tell Her GirlsMne NeedLove POP CLASSICS Standing RainLaff Sunshine ForNamdo ThankFor ManPiano CoinLane LovesYou Tmbourin Alone GldField Raindrop SultanSw Life’sWk TopWorld PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual MDB No. 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 MDB Name WatchGrl POP BALLAD WnderLnd CanIStop EvryTime IvoryAnd TheWorld LovWoman Dolannes Madigan Paradise Whisper BALLAD AllOdds AtonalFl Hero Woman RunToYou LoveOfAl CndleWnd Cavatina Cherish ToLoveMe YouKnow Evrythng EyesOfBl Hello BeThere FlyAway LoveYou NeverLet JustOnce IfYouGo SavingAl InTheDrk LovePwr Vision Beautifl AllAlone Opposite BeHonest SayYou SayNthng Stranger OneDay TheBayou ThisSong Distance ThisWay LoveGone Inspirng TrueColr ROCK & ROLL ShakenUp Beethovn HurryLov BeCruel Jumping Countdwn SuePeggy Champion Jailhous BlueShoe Rockin24 MDB No. 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 MDB Name Shouting Rock&Rll HonkyTnk OLDIES Daydream Sumertme Diana’s Uptown Apache IGotIt Tonight MyPillow NoRain FInalDance SlpnLion Ghetto LipsLcky PrettyWm TikiGtr TurnThre Sherry DANCE & DISCO Babylon Goodbye Catch22 DISCO Survival TheNavy DontHide Celebrat LondonRU 10,2 Sun ShakeYou Believe BoySumer I’mSexy StuffHot SWING & JAZZ Patrol Charles GiveLove Rhythm LOVE LeroyBad Caraban Misbehav Safari Smiling SoWhatIs TimeGone TasteHny Sandman Tunisian TwoFoot MyBaby R&B AsPlayed BabyGrov Highwy66 SweetCHI JustU&Me ManLoves OurLove Wish I Music Database List MDB No. 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 MDB Name COUNTRY OnTheRd Breathe InMyMind ContryHw GreenGrs EverNeed Lonesone Lucille HomeRng Tennesse LATIN Bananabt DanceMng DntWorry Jamaica FleaSpa I’mPola MamboJm OneNote PasoCani SayNoMor Beguine Tijuana Picture ENTERTAINMENT OnTheHil Barnacle Califrag DadClock DanceLd DnceFire BigCntry Cabaret OdeToJoy Mi-Re-Do MyPrince Necesary NoBuiz NoisyOld Sleigh RockBasy Magnifiq Magnfcnt SilentNt Nabucco Standing SummerPl Christms Favorite Tubbie Turkish 12OClock WALTZ & TRADITIONAL Blk&Whte CanCan Charmain Musicbox Clementn Doodah! Dreamer EnterRag Birthday MaryLamb MDB No. 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 MDB Name Donald’s MoonWlz MoulinHt Sunshine PieceOf GreenSlv TakeFour TexRose ThePolka Scarboro Edelweis AroundWd Whatever Yankee’s WORLD Hawaii D’amor ElCondor GoodbyRm ILandOn ItalyBel Cucarumb Puntuali Cielito ItalySun SantaLuc Trumpetr VanMass PIANIST ItalySun BeGood Birdland BlueRose Chaie’s Highwy66 Leaves Miload Cabaret Wonderfl Imagine LtleStar MapleRag Mi-Re-Do NoBuiz OhBlah Charades Sally’s Nabucco SunnyStr MistyFln LdnBridg GrndClck Importnc Snowman Favorite SongForU SugerSpn ThisWay WenSmile ZipperD PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 115 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM File Name 001Nutcr.mid 002Orphe.mid 003Slavo.mid 004Prima.mid 005Medit.mid 006Guill.mid 007Fruhl.mid 008Ungar.mid 009Fruhl.mid 010Dolly.mid 011Cande.mid 012Arabe.mid 013Pasto.mid 014Petit.mid 015Innoc.mid 016Progr.mid 017Taren.mid 018Cheva.mid 019Etude.mid 020Marci.mid 021Turki.mid 022Valse.mid 023Menue.mid 024Momen.mid 025Enter.mid 026Prelu.mid 027Violl.mid 028Angel.mid 029Saraf.mid 030Ameri.mid 031Brown.mid 032Lomon.mid 033Bonni.mid 034Londo.mid 035Banjo.mid 036Vogle.mid 037Lorel.mid 038Funic.mid 039Turke.mid 040Campt.mid 041Jingl.mid 042Muss.mid 043Liebe.mid 044Jesu.mid 045Joy.mid 046Pearl.mid 047Gavot.mid 048Seren.mid 049Menue.mid 050Canon.mid 051Vogel.mid 052Piano.mid 053Surpr.mid 054WildR.mid 055Chans.mid 056Babbi.mid 057RowRo.mid 058Smoky.mid 059WeWis.mid 060ImMai.mid 061Chris.mid 062MaryH.mid 063TenLi.mid 064PopGo.mid 065Twink.mid 066Close.mid 067Cucko.mid 068Augus.mid 069Londo.mid 070Three.mid Song Name Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” “Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture Slavonic Dances op.72-2 La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) Méditation (Thaïs) Guillaume Tell Frühlingslied Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 Frühlingsstimmen Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening La Candeur Arabesque Pastorale Petite Réunion Innocence Progrès Tarentelle La Chevaleresque Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” Marcia alla Turca Turkish March Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” Menuett Moments Musicaux op.94-3 The Entertainer Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) La Viollette Angels Serenade Krasnyj Sarafan America the Beautiful Little Brown Jug Loch Lomond My Bonnie Londonderry Air Ring de Banjo Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Die Lorelei Funiculi Funicula Turkey in the Straw Camptown Races Jingle Bells Muss i denn Liebesträume Nr.3 Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring Ode to Joy Pearl Fisher Gavotte Serenade/Haydn Menuett BWV. Anh.114 Canon in D Der Vogelfänger Bin Ich Ja “Die zauberflöte” Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 To a Wild Rose Chanson du Toreador O Mio Babbino Caro Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Im Mai (DUET) O Christmas Tree (DUET) Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Ten Little Indians (DUET) Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) The Cuckoo (DUET) O du lieber Augustin (DUET) London Bridge (DUET) Three Blind Mice (DUET) The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data. 116 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Composer P.I. Tchaikovsky J. Offenbach ˇ A. Dvorák A. Vivaldi J. Massenet G. Rossini F. Mendelssohn J. Brahms J. Strauss II T.Oesten J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller F.Chopin L.v. Beethoven W.A. Mozart F.Chopin L. Boccherini F. Schubert S. Joplin J.S. Bach L.Streabbog Traditional Traditional S.A. Ward Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional S.C. Foster Traditional F. Silcher L. Denza Traditional S.C. Foster J.S. Pierpont F. Silcher F. Liszt J.S. Bach L.v. Beethoven G. Bizet F.J. Gossec F.J. Haydn J.S. Bach J. Pachelbel W.A. Mozart L.v. Beethoven F.J. Haydn E.A. MacDowell G. Bizet G. Puccini Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional S. Winner Traditional Traditional J.J. Rousseau Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Effect Type List ● Harmony Types No. Harmony Type 01 Duet 02 Trio 03 Block 04 Country 05 Octave 06 Trill 1/4 note Description Harmony types 01–05 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing songs that contain chord data. 3 07 Trill 1/6 note 08 Trill 1/8 note 09 Trill 1/12 note 10 Trill 1/16 note 11 Trill 1/24 note 12 Trill 1/32 note 13 Tremolo 1/4 note 14 Tremolo 1/6 note 15 Tremolo 1/8 note 16 Tremolo 1/12 note 17 Tremolo 1/16 note 18 Tremolo 1/24 note 19 Tremolo 1/32 note 20 Echo 1/4 note 21 Echo 1/6 note 22 Echo 1/8 note 23 Echo 1/12 note 24 Echo 1/16 note 25 Echo 1/24 note 26 Echo 1/32 note 3 Types 6–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 27). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets. • The Trill effect Types (06–12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are held. • The Tremolo effect Types (13–19) repeat all held notes (up to four). • The Echo effect Types (20–26) create delayed repeats of each note played. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ● Reverb Types No. Reverb Type Description 01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb. 04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb. 06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. 08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Off No effect. 10 ● Chorus Types No. Chorus Type Description 01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. 03–04 Flanger 1–2 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound. Off No effect. 05 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 117 118 Model PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Change Control 0,32 1,11,84 6,38 7,10 64 71-74 91,93 96-97 100-101 Key’s Ch’s After Touch Pitch Bend Note ON Note OFF Velocity o x o o o o o x o o 0-24 semi x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 9nH,v=0 *1 *1 0 - 127 : True voice ************** 3 x ************** Default Messages Altered Mode Note Number 1 - 16 x Default Changed o o o o o o o o o o 0-24 semi x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 0 - 127 0 - 127 3 x x 1 - 16 x Recognized MIDI Implementation Chart Transmitted PSR-E413 Basic Channel Function... YAMAHA Sustain Sound Controller Effect Depth RPN Inc,Dec RPN LSB,MSB Data Entry Bank Select Remarks Date:10-OCT-2007 Version : 1.0 MIDI Implementation Chart : True # x x x x o x o(120,126,127) o(121) o(122) o(123-125) o x o o x x x o o 0 - 127 *1 Refer to #2 on page 120. Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO :All Sound OFF :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF Mes- :Active Sense sages:Reset Aux x x x o o : Song Pos. : Song Sel. : Tune o o 0 - 127 ************** System : Clock Real Time: Commands Common System Exclusive Prog Change o : Yes x : No MIDI Implementation Chart PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 119 MIDI Data Format NOTE: 1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment, and songs. • MIDI Master Tuning • System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type and Chorus Type. 2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the Harmony effect. 3 Exclusive <GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H • This message automatically restores all default settings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H • This message allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive). • The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values for “ll” are ignored.) <MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H • This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of all channels. • The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning. • The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respectively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc”. <Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Reverb Type MSB • ll : Reverb Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 120) for details. <Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Chorus Type MSB • ll : Chorus Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 120) for details. 4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are recognized. 5 Local ON/OFF <Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F <Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00 Value for “n” is ignored. ■ Effect map * When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest to the specified value) is automatically set. * The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display. ● REVERB TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 00 000 No Effect 001 (01)Hall1 002 Room 003 004 005...127 01 02 08 16 17 (02)Hall2 (03)Hall3 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2 18 (04)Room1 19 20 (05)Room2 No Effect ● CHORUS TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 000...063 00 Thru 065 Chorus 066 Celeste 067 Flanger 120 02 08 16 17 No Effect 064 068...127 01 No Effect PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual (02)Chorus2 (01)Chorus1 (03)Flanger1 (04)Flanger2 18 19 20 ATTENTION SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”). BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s) and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data. The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is protected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copyrights. • You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer. • You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy of the SOFTWARE. • You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFTWARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement. 2. RESTRICTIONS • You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method whatsoever. • You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE. • You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers. • You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that violates public policy. • You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without permission by Yamaha Corporation. Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you must observe. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any commercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public without permission of the copyright owner. • The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission of the copyright owner. 3. TERMINATION This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written documents and all copies thereof. 4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA 5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS” and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PERMIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFTWARE. 7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof. • Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including, without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, misuse or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. 8. GENERAL This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or procedure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. 9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a fully authorized representative of Yamaha. As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 121 SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT By installing and/or using this Product you (an individual or legal entity) agree with the Licensor to be bound by the terms of this License which will govern your use of the Product. If you do not accept these terms, do not install or use this Product. The Product is copyright © 1987-2007 Sibelius Software, a division of Avid Technology, Inc, and its licensors. 1. Definitions In this License the following words and expressions have the following meanings: “License”: this agreement between you and the Licensor and, if permitted by the context, the conditional license granted to you in this agreement. “Licensor”: Avid Technology, Inc., of Avid Technology Park, One Park West, Tewksbury, MA 01876 USA, through its division Sibelius Software, of 20-23 City North, Fonthill Road, London N4 3HF, UK “Product”: the Software and the Documentation. “Software”: the Sibelius Scorch web browser plug-in, Opus, Helsinki, Inkpen2 and Reprise font families, any other programs or files supplied by the Licensor which are included in or with the Sibelius Scorch installer, and the Sibelius Scorch installer. “Documentation”: any documentation in any form relating to the Software supplied to you with the Software or by the Licensor. 2. License 2.1 The Licensor grants to you a non-exclusive non-transferable license to use this Software in accordance with the Documentation on any number of computers. Title to the Product is not transferred to you. Ownership of the Product remains vested in the Licensor and its licensors, subject to the rights granted to you under this License. All other rights are reserved. You may make one printout for your own use of any part of the Documentation provided in electronic form. You shall not make or permit any third party to make any further copies of any part of the Product whether in eye or machine-readable form. You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to, (1) translate, enhance, modify, alter or adapt the Product or any part of it for any purpose (including without limitation for the purpose of error correction); (2) create derivative works based on the Product, or cause the whole or any part of the Product to be combined with or incorporated into any other program, file or product, for any purpose; or (3) use the Software to create files in any format (other than temporary files created and required by your computer’s operating system or web browser), including without limitation screen capture files, files generated from the Software’s playback, graphics files and print files, for any purpose, except for creating MIDI files (if permitted by the Software) for private non-commercial use. You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to, decompile, decode, disassemble or reverse engineer the Software in whole or in part for any purpose. You shall not, and shall not cause any third party to, translate, convert, decode or reverse engineer any file capable of being read by any copy or version of the Software or any data transmitted to or from any copy or version of the Software, in whole or in part for any purpose. The Product or any part of it must not be used to infringe any right of copyright or right of privacy, publicity or personality or any other right whatsoever of any other person or entity. 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 3. Copyright 3.1 You acknowledge that copyright in the Product as a whole and in the components of the Product as between you and the Licensor belongs to the Licensor or its licensors and is protected by copyright laws, national and international, and all other applicable laws. 4. Disclaimer of Liability 4.1 In consideration of the fact that the Product is licensed hereunder free of charge, (a) the Licensor disclaims any and all warranties with respect to the Product, whether expressed or implied, including without limitation any warranties that the Product is free from defects, will perform in accordance with the Documentation, is merchantable, or is fit for any particular purpose, and (b) the Licensor shall not have or incur any liability to you for any loss, cost, expense or claim (including without limitation any liability for loss or corruption of data and loss of profits, revenue or goodwill and any type of special, indirect or consequential loss) that may arise out of or in connection with your installation and use of the Product. 5. Termination 5.1 This License shall terminate automatically upon your destruction of the Product. In addition, the Licensor may elect to terminate this License in the event of a material breach by you of any condition of this License or of any of your representations, warranties, covenants or obligations hereunder. Upon notification of such termination by the Licensor, you will immediately delete the Software from your computer and destroy the Documentation. 6. Miscellaneous 6.1 No failure to exercise and no delay in exercising on the part of the Licensor of any right, power or privilege arising hereunder shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right, power or privilege preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power or privilege. The rights and remedies of the Licensor in connection herewith are not exclusive of any rights or remedies provided by law. You may not distribute, loan, lease, sub-license, rent or otherwise transfer the Product to any third party. You agree to the use of your personal data in accordance with the Licensor’s privacy policy (available from the Licensor or on www.sibelius.com), which may change from time to time. This License is intended by the parties hereto to be a final expression of their agreement with respect to the subject matter hereof and a complete and exclusive statement of the terms of such agreement. This License supercedes any and all prior understandings, whether written or oral, between you and the Licensor relating to the subject matter hereof. (This section only applies if you are resident in the European Union:) This License shall be construed and governed by the laws of England, and both parties agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts. (This section only applies if you are not resident in the European Union:) This License shall be construed and enforced in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of California. Any suit, action or proceeding arising out of or in any way related or connected to this License shall be brought and maintained only in the United States District Court for the Northern District of California, sitting in the City of San Francisco. Each party irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of such federal court over any such suit, action or proceeding. Each party knowingly, voluntarily and irrevocably waives trial by jury in any suit, action or proceeding (including any counterclaim), whether at law or in equity, arising out of or in any way related or connected to this License or the subject matter hereof. 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 (License v5.0 (DMN), 30 July 2007) 122 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Specifications Keyboards Effects • 61 standard-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response. Display • LCD display (backlit) Setup • STANDBY/ON • MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX Panel Controls f r • VOICE CONTROL: [SPLIT], [DUAL], [HARMONY], [TOUCH] • LIVE CONTROL: [ASSIGN] • STYLE CONTROL: [ACMP ON/OFF], [INTRO/ENDING/rit.], [MAIN/AUTO FILL], [SYNC STOP], [SYNC START], [START/ STOP] • SONG CONTROL: [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN), [ ] (A-B REPEAT), [ ] (REW], [ ] (FF), [ ] (PAUSE), [ ] (START/STOP) • REGIST MEMORY: [MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] • SONG MEMORY: [REC], [1]-[5], [A] • LESSON: [START], [L], [R] • ARPEGGIO: [ON/OFF], [TYPE] • [DEMO/PC], [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT], [FUNCTION], [MUSIC DATABASE], [METRONOME], [PORTABLE GRAND], [SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE], [VOICE], Dial, CATEGORY[ ]/[ ], [0]-[9], [+]/[-], [TEMPO/ TAP] Realtime Control • • • • Reverb: Chorus: Harmony: Arpeggio: 9 types 4 types 26 types 100 types Song • 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM Songs (70) • Song Clear, Track Clear • Song Volume • Song Control: REPEAT & LEARN, A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF, START/STOP Performance assistant technology Recording • Song User Song: 5 Songs Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE MIDI • Local On/Off • Keyboard Out • Initial Send • Style Out • External Clock • Song Out Auxiliary jacks • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB, SUSTAIN Amplifier • 2.5W + 2.5W Speakers • Pitch Bend Wheel • Knobs A, B A: Cutoff, Reverb, Attack, Style Cutoff, Style Tempo B: Resonance, Chorus, Release, Style Resonance Voice • 116 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices + 20 arpeggio voices • Polyphony: 32 • DUAL • SPLIT • 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2 Power Consumption • 10W Power Supply • Adaptor: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha • Batteries: Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries Dimensions (W x D x H) • 946 x 402 x 136 mm (37-1/4" x 15-13/16" x 5-3/8") Weight Style • 165 Preset Styles + External files • Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL • Fingering: Multi Finger • Style Volume Music Database • 300 + External files Education Feature • Dictionary • Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn Registration Memory • 7.0kg (15 lbs. 7 oz.) (not including batteries) Supplied Accessories • Music Rest • Accessory CD-ROM • Owner’s Manual Optional Accessories • AC Power Adaptor: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha • Footswitch: FC4/FC5 • Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L • Headphones: HPE-150 • 8 banks x 2 types Function • VOLUME: • OVERALL: • MAIN VOICE: • DUAL VOICE: • SPLIT VOICE: • • • • • • EFFECT: HARMONY: ARPEGGIO: SFF Load: PC: MIDI: Style Volume, Song Volume Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Pitch Bend Range Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type Harmony Type, Harmony Volume * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio Velocity Style File Load PC Mode Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send, Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out • METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature Denominator, Metronome Volume • LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L) • UTILITY: Grade, Demo Cancel, Sleep PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 123 Index Panel controls and terminals A A-B Repeat ...........................................78 Accessories .............................................7 ACMP ...................................................34 Arpeggio ...............................................14 Arpeggio List ......................................113 Arpeggio Type ......................................15 Arpeggio Velocity ................................67 Attack ....................................................20 Auto Accompaniment Range ................34 Auto-Accompaniment ..........................34 AWM ......................................................6 r f +, - .................................................. 13, 58 ....................................................... 57 (REPEAT & LEARN) ............ 12, 48 (A-B REPEAT) ................... 12, 78 (REW) ..................................... 12, 40 (FF) ......................................... 12, 40 (PAUSE) .................................... 12, 40 (START/STOP) ..................... 12, 58 0–9 .................................................. 13, 58 ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 12, 34 ARPEGGIO ON/OFF .................... 12, 14 ARPEGGIO TYPE ......................... 12, 15 ASSIGN ......................................... 12, 18 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] .......... 13, 58 DC IN 12V ..................................... 10, 13 DEMO/PC ...................................... 12, 40 Dial ................................................. 13, 58 DUAL ............................................. 13, 29 EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 12, 50 FUNCTION .................................... 12, 83 HARMONY ................................... 13, 60 INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 12, 71 KNOB A, B .................................... 12, 18 LESSON L, R ................................. 12, 44 LESSON START ........................... 12, 44 MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 12, 71 MASTER VOLUME ..................... 12, 24 MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 13, 80 METRONOME .............................. 12, 63 MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 13, 49 PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT .... 12, 23 PHONES/OUTPUT ....................... 11, 13 PITCH BEND wheel ...................... 13, 66 PORTABLE GRAND .................... 13, 31 REC, 1–5, A ................................... 12, 52 REGIST MEMORY ....................... 13, 80 SONG ............................................. 13, 39 SONG MEMORY .......................... 12, 52 SPLIT ............................................. 13, 30 STANDBY/ON ...............................11-12 STYLE ........................................... 13, 33 SUSTAIN ....................................... 11, 13 SYNC START ............................... 12, 70 SYNC STOP .................................. 12, 71 TEMPO/TAP .................................. 12, 27 TOUCH .......................................... 13, 65 USB ................................................ 13, 87 VOICE ............................................ 13, 28 Alphabetical order B Backup ..................................................56 C CD-ROM ..............................................93 Channel Message ..................................87 Chord .................................. 36, 38, 75-76 Chord Dictionary ..................................77 CHORD ROOT ....................................77 CHORD TYPE .....................................77 Chorus .............................................19, 62 Chorus Type .................................62, 117 Computer ..............................................87 Cutoff ....................................................19 Default Setting ......................................83 Delete (Song Track) ..............................55 Delete (User Song) ...............................55 Demo ....................................................40 Demo Cancel ........................................85 Display ..................................................59 Drum Kit ...............................................32 Drum Kit List ......................................110 Dual Voice ............................................29 Dual Voice Chorus Level .....................84 Dual Voice Octave ................................84 Dual Voice Pan .....................................84 Dual Voice Reverb Level .....................84 Dual Voice Volume ..............................84 Easy Chords ..........................................38 Easy Song Arranger ..............................50 Effect Map ..........................................120 Effect Type List ..................................117 External Song .......................................42 F Filter ......................................................19 Filter (Style) ..........................................20 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual G Grade .................................................... 45 H Harmony ............................................... 60 Harmony Type ..................................... 60 Harmony Volume ................................. 69 Headphones .......................................... 11 I Initial Send ..................................... 85, 90 Initialization ......................................... 56 K Keyboard Out ....................................... 88 L Lesson .................................................. 43 Load SFF .............................................. 74 Local ..................................................... 88 L-Part ................................................... 92 D E 124 Flash Memory ...................................... 42 Foot Switch .......................................... 11 Function .......................................... 83-84 M Main Voice ........................................... 28 Main Voice Chorus Level .................... 84 Main Voice Octave .............................. 84 Main Voice Pan .................................... 84 Main Voice Reverb Level .................... 84 Main Voice Volume ............................. 84 Master EQ Type ................................... 69 Measure ................................................ 59 Melody Voice ................................. 51, 79 Metronome ........................................... 63 MIDI ..................................................... 86 MIDI Data Format ............................. 120 MIDI Implementation Chart .............. 118 Music Database .................................... 49 Music Database List ........................... 114 Music Rest .............................................. 7 Mute ..................................................... 79 N Notation ................................................ 59 O One Touch Setting ............................... 68 Index P PC Mode ............................................... 89 Performance assistant technology ........ 23 Pitch Bend Range ................................. 84 Power Adaptor ..................................... 10 Preset Song ................................39, 41-42 R Recording ............................................. 52 Registration Memory ........................... 80 Release ................................................. 20 Remote control ..................................... 89 Repeat ................................................... 48 Resonance ............................................ 19 Reverb ............................................ 19, 61 Reverb Type ....................................... 117 R-Part ................................................... 92 Touch Response ....................................65 Touch Sensitivity ..................................65 Track ............................................... 52-55 Track Clear ...........................................55 Transfer ........................................... 90-92 Transpose ..............................................66 Troubleshooting (Installation) ..............98 Troubleshooting (Instrument) ...............99 Tuning ...................................................66 U USB ......................................................87 USB-MIDI Driver ........................... 96-97 User Song .............................................52 V Voice .....................................................28 Voice List ...........................................106 S Save (Backup File) ............................... 92 Save (Panel Setting) ............................. 80 Score ............................................100-105 Sleep ..................................................... 82 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................... 90 Software Licensing Agreement .......... 121 Song ...................................................... 39 Song Clear ............................................ 55 Song List ...................................... 41, 116 Song Memory ....................................... 52 Song Out ............................................... 88 Song Volume ........................................ 78 Specifications ..................................... 123 Split Point ....................................... 30, 72 Split Voice ............................................ 30 Split Voice Chorus Level ..................... 84 Split Voice Octave ............................... 84 Split Voice Pan ..................................... 84 Split Voice Reverb Level ..................... 84 Split Voice Volume .............................. 84 Standard Chords ................................... 38 Style ...........................................33-37, 70 Style File .............................................. 74 Style List ............................................ 112 Style Out ............................................... 88 Style Tempo ......................................... 20 Style Volume ........................................ 72 Sustain (Footswitch) ............................. 11 Synchro Start ............................ 34, 36, 70 Synchro Stop ........................................ 71 System Message ................................... 87 X XGlite .....................................................6 T Tempo .................................................. 27 Time Denominator ............................... 64 Time Numerator ................................... 64 Time Signature ..................................... 63 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 125 Limited Warranty 90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in the following series of products: PSR SERIES OF DIGITAL KEYBOARD If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor. If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements. THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state. CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities: 1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below. 2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under warranty. 3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely. *Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days. IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed. 4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to follow all safety precautions. EXCLUSIONS This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of: 1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity. 2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha. 3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country. Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below. Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________ Purchased from____________________________________________________________ (Retailer) Date______________________________________ YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620 KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL! 126 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria, CEE Department Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE FINLAND Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 TAIWAN NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia Tel: 495 626 0660 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 EKB45 Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2007 Yamaha Corporation WM17300 XXXPOXXX.X-02B1 Printed in China